Configuration Guide CONFIDENTIAL

Document Version: 1.4 - Final

Date: Sept. 01, 2023

Configuration Guide
PRA
Configuration Guide

Typographic Conventions

Type Style Description

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include field names, screen titles,
pushbuttons labels, menu names, menu paths, and menu options.
Textual cross-references to other documents.

Example Emphasized words or expressions.

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects. These include report names, program names, transaction
codes, table names, and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded
by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example Output on the screen. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages,
names of variables and parameters, source text, and names of installation, upgrade and
database tools.

Example Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they
appear in the documentation.

<Example> Variable user entry. Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with
appropriate entries to make entries in the system.

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard, for example, F 2 or E N T E R .

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.3 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 2
Configuration Guide

Document History

Version Status Date Change

1.4 Final 2023-09-01 Updated for 2023 release

1.3 Final 2016-03-28 Final KM Review

1.2 Draft 2016-03-22 KM Review

1.1 Draft 2016-03-04 Technical Review by PRA Team

0.1 Draft 2016-01-28 In Progress

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 3
Configuration Guide

Table of Contents

1 About This Document ......................................................................................................... 13

1.1 Authors ............................................................................................................................................................ 13
1.2 Purpose and Scope ......................................................................................................................................... 13
1.3 Target Audience .............................................................................................................................................. 13
1.4 Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 13

2 Switch Framework .............................................................................................................. 14

2.1 Activate Business Functions ............................................................................................................................ 14
2.1.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.3 Business Functions Utility ................................................................................................................ 16
2.2 Business Configuration Sets (BCS) ................................................................................................................. 20
2.2.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 20
2.2.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 21

3 Core Data Setup .................................................................................................................. 23

3.1 Company Code................................................................................................................................................ 23
3.1.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 23
3.2 Material Master ................................................................................................................................................ 23
3.2.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 23
3.3 Sales Area/Cost Centers/Profit Centers .......................................................................................................... 23
3.3.1 Sales Area ....................................................................................................................................... 23
3.3.2 Cost Centers .................................................................................................................................... 24
3.3.3 Profit Center..................................................................................................................................... 24
3.4 Joint Venture Accounting ................................................................................................................................. 24
3.4.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 24
3.5 Chart of Accounts ............................................................................................................................................ 24
3.5.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 24
3.5.2 Prerequisite...................................................................................................................................... 24
3.5.3 Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 25
3.5.4 Account Entry Control ...................................................................................................................... 25

4 Infrastructure Setup ........................................................................................................... 27

4.1 Quantity Conversion Interface (QCI) Configuration ......................................................................................... 27
4.1.1 Define QCI Parameters ................................................................................................................... 27
4.1.2 Activate SAP Conversion Routines for Natural Gas ........................................................................ 28
4.1.3 Define Conversion Group and External Function Module Settings .................................................. 29
4.1.4 Configure Message Handling........................................................................................................... 32
4.1.5 Define Physical Properties for Natural Gas Components ................................................................ 33
4.2 Logical and Physical file directory/path setup .................................................................................................. 36
4.2.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 36
4.2.2 Activities........................................................................................................................................... 37
4.2.3 Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 37

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 4
Configuration Guide

5 PRA Global Settings ............................................................................................................ 39

5.1 Number Ranges .............................................................................................................................................. 39
5.1.1 Regulatory/Production Reporting ..................................................................................................... 39
5.1.2 Production........................................................................................................................................ 40
5.1.3 Contractual Allocation ...................................................................................................................... 45
5.1.4 Balancing Statement ........................................................................................................................ 66
5.1.5 Ownership........................................................................................................................................ 71
5.1.6 Valuation .......................................................................................................................................... 73
5.1.7 Check Input...................................................................................................................................... 77
5.1.8 Payment Processing ........................................................................................................................ 78
5.1.9 Maintain Common Number Ranges ................................................................................................. 79
5.1.10 Maintain Number Range Groups ..................................................................................................... 80
5.1.11 Maintain Number Range Intervals ................................................................................................... 83
5.2 Production Tax and Royalty Reporting ............................................................................................................ 88
5.2.1 Use .................................................................................................................................................. 88
5.2.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 88
5.2.3 Tax ................................................................................................................................................... 89
5.3 Units of Measurement (UoM)........................................................................................................................... 94
5.3.1 Check Units of Measurement........................................................................................................... 94
5.3.2 Define Unit of Measurement Groups ............................................................................................. 100
5.3.3 Define Rounding ............................................................................................................................ 103
5.4 Measurement System .................................................................................................................................... 105
5.4.1 Quantity Conversion Interface (QCI) Configuration ....................................................................... 105
5.4.2 Define Calculations ........................................................................................................................ 105
5.4.3 Assign Calculations to Measurement Types .................................................................................. 106
5.4.4 Define Reading Types ................................................................................................................... 109
5.4.5 Define Measurement Types ........................................................................................................... 112
5.4.6 Define Measurement Classes ........................................................................................................ 115
5.4.7 Define Measurement Sources ....................................................................................................... 117
5.4.8 Define Measurement Reading Derivation ...................................................................................... 118
5.5 Org Levels/Geo Locations ............................................................................................................................. 119
5.5.1 Cross Reference between Country and Primary Geographic Location .......................................... 119
5.5.2 Cross Reference between Country, Primary, and Secondary Geographic Location ...................... 120
5.5.3 Maintain Primary Geographic Location Pressure Base ................................................................. 122
5.6 Application Toolbar Navigation ...................................................................................................................... 124
5.6.1 Application Maintenance ................................................................................................................ 124
5.6.2 Mapping Definition ......................................................................................................................... 125
5.6.3 User-Specific Assignment .............................................................................................................. 127

6 Production ......................................................................................................................... 129

6.1 Maintain Number Range Groups ................................................................................................................... 129
6.2 Maintain Number Range Interval ................................................................................................................... 129
6.3 Silo/Tank Management .................................................................................................................................. 129
6.3.1 Define Storage Object Class.......................................................................................................... 129
6.3.2 Define Additional Settings for Storage Object Class ...................................................................... 130
6.3.3 Define Storage Object Types ......................................................................................................... 131
6.4 Statistical Key Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 133
6.4.1 Well Count SKF Downtime Minor Workover – TBLGR030 ............................................................ 133
6.4.2 PRA to CO SKF Cross Reference – OIUPR_SKFX....................................................................... 134
6.4.3 Well Count SKF Downtime Reg Reasons – TBLGR029 ................................................................ 135

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 5
Configuration Guide

6.4.4 Well Count SKF Plug, Sold, Abandoned ST – TBLGR025 ............................................................ 136
6.4.5 Drilling Days SKF Major Workover Downtime Reasons ................................................................ 137
6.4.6 Drilling Days Drilling Status Codes ................................................................................................ 138
6.4.7 Define Cycle Segment Configuration ............................................................................................. 139
6.5 Measurement Type Configuration ................................................................................................................. 140
6.5.1 Chemical Analysis Measurement Type Configuration ................................................................... 140
6.5.2 Measurement Point Volumes Measurement Type Configuration ................................................... 141
6.5.3 Well Test Measurement type Configuration ................................................................................... 143
6.5.4 Well Completion Volumes Measurement Type Configuration ........................................................ 144
6.5.5 MP Volumes Tank Strapping Usage Configuration ........................................................................ 145
6.5.6 Measurement Point Volume Measurement Type Assignment to Measurement Reading .............. 147
6.5.7 Measurement Point Measurement Type Derivation ....................................................................... 148
6.6 Well-Related Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 150
6.6.1 Define Platform Location ............................................................................................................... 150
6.6.2 Define Platform Types ................................................................................................................... 151
6.6.3 Define Well Drilling Directions........................................................................................................ 152
6.6.4 Define Well Completion Purposes ................................................................................................. 153
6.6.5 Define Well Completion Programs ................................................................................................. 155
6.6.6 Define Well Completion Status Codes ........................................................................................... 156
6.6.7 Define Well Class/Well Status Xref ................................................................................................ 157
6.6.8 Define Producing Methods............................................................................................................. 158
6.6.9 Define Non-Producing Status Codes ............................................................................................. 159
6.6.10 Define Crude Types ....................................................................................................................... 160
6.6.11 Define Downtime Reasons ............................................................................................................ 162
6.6.12 Define Lifestage Events ................................................................................................................. 163
6.6.13 Maintain API Side Track Code at Well Completion [NOTE: Available only in Roadmap
Landscape] .................................................................................................................................... 163
6.7 Measurement Point Configuration ................................................................................................................. 164
6.7.1 Define Chart Types ........................................................................................................................ 164
6.7.2 Define Meter Classes .................................................................................................................... 165
6.7.3 Define Transportation Methods...................................................................................................... 166
6.7.4 Define Volume Sources ................................................................................................................. 167
6.8 Function/Allocation Configuration .................................................................................................................. 169
6.8.1 Define Volume Allocation Metered Volume Configuration ............................................................. 169
6.8.2 Define Production Configurable Functions..................................................................................... 170
6.8.3 Define Plant Allocation Methods .................................................................................................... 171
6.8.4 Define Theoretical Calculation Methods ........................................................................................ 172
6.8.5 Define Volume Type Gas Lift Gas Reclassification ........................................................................ 174
6.8.6 Define Volume Type Cross Reference to Reproduced Gas........................................................... 175
6.8.7 Create Volume Allocation Server Group ........................................................................................ 176
6.8.8 Assign Server Group to Volume Allocation .................................................................................... 178
6.9 Maintain Primary Geographic Location Pressure Base ................................................................................. 180
6.10 Override Parameter ID [Optional] .................................................................................................................. 180
6.11 Production Master Data ................................................................................................................................. 181
6.11.1 Setting up a Product Code Reference for Materials ....................................................................... 182
6.11.2 Reclassification of Materials to Product Codes. ............................................................................. 184
6.11.3 SKF Cross-Referencing ................................................................................................................. 186

7 Ownership ......................................................................................................................... 192

7.1 Partner ........................................................................................................................................................... 192

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 6
Configuration Guide

7.1.1 Assign Relevant Account Groups of Vendor .................................................................................. 192

7.1.2 Assign Relevant Account Groups of Customer .............................................................................. 193
7.1.3 Maintain Address Types ................................................................................................................ 194
7.2 Owner Request.............................................................................................................................................. 195
7.2.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 195
7.2.2 Owner Request Global settings ..................................................................................................... 195
7.2.3 Assign Number Ranges ................................................................................................................. 197
7.2.4 Owner Request Document Types .................................................................................................. 198
7.2.5 Transfer Reason Codes ................................................................................................................. 199
7.3 Schedule 'A' Report Field Configuration ........................................................................................................ 201
7.4 Maintain Suspense Reason Codes ............................................................................................................... 203
7.4.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 203
7.4.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 203
7.5 Legal Description ........................................................................................................................................... 204
7.5.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 204
7.5.2 Maintain Legal Description Field Codes ........................................................................................ 205
7.5.3 Assign Legal Description Fields to Legal Description Type Codes ................................................ 207
7.6 Maintain Combined Product Codes ............................................................................................................... 208
7.6.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 208
7.7 Combined Product Code/Major Product Code Cross Reference ................................................................... 210
7.7.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 210
7.7.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 210
7.8 Venture Status Codetable ............................................................................................................................. 212
7.9 Partner Integration ......................................................................................................................................... 213
7.9.1 Global settings ............................................................................................................................... 213
7.9.2 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 213
7.9.3 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 214
7.9.4 Commands .................................................................................................................................... 215
7.9.5 Business Object Services .............................................................................................................. 216
7.9.6 Maintain System Number Range Intervals for Outbound Connection ID ....................................... 217
7.10 Marketing Free Maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 218
7.10.1 Maintain Mkt. Free Number ranges ............................................................................................... 218
7.11 Dynamic SD Instruction ................................................................................................................................. 219
7.11.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 219
7.11.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 220

8 Contracts and Pricing ....................................................................................................... 221

8.1 Processing Contract Number Range Maintenance........................................................................................ 221
8.1.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 221
8.1.2 Activities......................................................................................................................................... 221
8.1.3 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 221
8.2 Define Contract Groups ................................................................................................................................. 221
8.2.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 221
8.2.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 222
8.3 Maintain PRA Contract Type Cross Reference ............................................................................................. 223
8.3.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 223
8.3.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 223
8.4 Define the Posting Co., Gravity ID, and Scale Definition and Default Codes ................................................ 224
8.4.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 224
8.4.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 224

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 7
Configuration Guide

8.5 Define Quotation Groups and Group Items ................................................................................................... 225

8.5.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 225
8.5.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 225
8.6 Define Quotation Types (uses Downstream Functions) ................................................................................ 226
8.6.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 226
8.6.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 226
8.7 Define Quotation Data (Link to Downstream Functions) ................................................................................ 227
8.7.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 227
8.7.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 227
8.8 Change the Marketing Cost Description ........................................................................................................ 228
8.8.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 228
8.8.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 228
8.9 Maintain Contract Types Requiring Sale Type Code for Dual Accounting ..................................................... 229
8.9.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 229
8.9.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 229
8.10 Define Brand Codes ...................................................................................................................................... 230
8.10.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 230
8.10.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 230
8.11 Contracts and Pricing Master Data ................................................................................................................ 231
8.11.1 Purpose ......................................................................................................................................... 231
8.12 PRA Contract Maintenance (O3UCM_CONTRACTS) ................................................................................... 231
8.12.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 231
8.12.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 231
8.13 Pricing Terms-Create Condition (VK11) ........................................................................................................ 233
8.13.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 233
8.13.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 233
8.14 CO2 Removal Fee Processing (O3UCP_CO2_RMV0) ................................................................................. 234
8.14.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 234
8.14.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 234
8.15 Contract Marketing Costs (O3UCP_MKT_CST0) .......................................................................................... 235
8.15.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 235
8.15.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 235
8.16 UCA Rate Maintenance (/PRA/FF_UCA_MAINT) ......................................................................................... 236
8.16.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 236
8.16.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 236
8.17 Tax and Royalty Reimbursement (O3UCP_TAR_RMB0) .............................................................................. 237
8.17.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 237
8.17.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 237
8.18 Formula Repository (O3UI7).......................................................................................................................... 238
8.18.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 238
8.18.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 238
8.19 Prices (O3U_PP2) ......................................................................................................................................... 239
8.19.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 239
8.19.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 239
8.20 Gravity Scales (O3U_SCM2) ......................................................................................................................... 240
8.20.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 240
8.20.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 240

9 Sales and Balancing ......................................................................................................... 242

9.1 Contractual allocation .................................................................................................................................... 242

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 8
Configuration Guide

9.1.1 Define Sliding Scale Properties ..................................................................................................... 242

9.1.2 Define Product Control Not Selling Reason Codes ........................................................................ 244
9.1.3 Create Contractual Allocation Server Group .................................................................................. 245
9.1.4 Assign Server Group to Contractual Allocation .............................................................................. 246
9.1.5 Define CA Entitlement Volume Types ............................................................................................ 248
9.1.6 Define Global Settings for Contractual Allocation .......................................................................... 249
9.1.7 Create Contractual Allocation Gas Analysis Combined Component .............................................. 250
9.1.8 Miscellaneous Activities ................................................................................................................. 251
9.2 Balancing ....................................................................................................................................................... 254
9.2.1 Define Adjustment Reason Codes ................................................................................................. 254
9.2.2 Maintain Valid Smartforms for Balancing Statement ...................................................................... 255
9.2.3 Define Default Smartform .............................................................................................................. 256
9.2.4 Define/Maintain Product Balancing Agreement Groups ................................................................. 257
9.2.5 Define/Maintain Balancing Product Groups ................................................................................... 258
9.2.6 Define Balancing Message Types ................................................................................................. 260
9.2.7 Miscellaneous Activities ................................................................................................................. 262

10 Revenue Accounting ......................................................................................................... 263

10.1 Valuation ....................................................................................................................................................... 263
10.1.1 Maintain the Dialog Process Limit for VL Doc. ............................................................................... 263
10.1.2 Create Valuation Server Group...................................................................................................... 264
10.1.3 Assign Server Group to Valuation.................................................................................................. 265
10.1.4 Maintain Theoretical Wet Gas cost Calc. basis for Dual Accounting ............................................. 266
10.1.5 Maintain UCA Rate Types ............................................................................................................. 267
10.2 Configure Taxes ............................................................................................................................................ 267
10.2.1 Define Severance Tax Types......................................................................................................... 267
10.2.2 State Tax Configuration ................................................................................................................. 269
10.2.3 Valuation Tax Configuration........................................................................................................... 270
10.2.4 Severance Tax Type Group Table ................................................................................................. 271
10.2.5 Define Tax Classes ........................................................................................................................ 272
10.2.6 Define School District Codes ......................................................................................................... 274
10.2.7 Maintain Severance Tax type by State and Interest Category ....................................................... 274
10.3 Check Input ................................................................................................................................................... 275
10.3.1 Maintain Product Code Price Range .............................................................................................. 275
10.3.2 Maintain Receivable Decimal......................................................................................................... 276
10.3.3 Maintain Miscellaneous Income or Deduct Account ...................................................................... 277
10.3.4 Check layout .................................................................................................................................. 277
10.3.5 Remitter/Layout Cross-Reference ................................................................................................. 278
10.3.6 Remitter/DOI Cross-Reference ...................................................................................................... 279
10.3.7 Remitter/Purchaser Cross-Reference ............................................................................................ 279
10.3.8 Process Rules................................................................................................................................ 280
10.3.9 Translations ................................................................................................................................... 280
10.3.10 CDEX Remitter Cross-Reference .................................................................................................. 281
10.3.11 CDEX Remitter Cross-Reference .................................................................................................. 281
10.4 Payment Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 282
10.4.1 Enable Process.............................................................................................................................. 282
10.4.2 Maintain High level Configuration .................................................................................................. 283
10.4.3 Maintain Check Detail Level Override by Region........................................................................... 284
10.4.4 Maintain Process Group ................................................................................................................ 285
10.4.5 Maintain Process Group/Cash Company XRef .............................................................................. 286

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 9
Configuration Guide

10.4.6 Define House Banks ...................................................................................................................... 288

10.4.7 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 288
10.4.8 Define Number Ranges for Checks ............................................................................................... 289
10.4.9 Maintain Payment Processing Number Ranges ............................................................................ 291
10.4.10 Maintain Cash Company Bank Information.................................................................................... 292
10.4.11 Maintain Company/Process Group XRef ....................................................................................... 293
10.4.12 Maintain Company Minimum Pay Information ............................................................................... 294
10.4.13 Maintain Tax Type Code ................................................................................................................ 295
10.4.14 Maintain Remittance Advice Codes ............................................................................................... 296
10.4.15 Maintain Marketing Type XRef....................................................................................................... 297
10.4.16 Maintain Tax Type XRef ................................................................................................................ 298
10.4.17 Maintain Other Deduct Type XRef ................................................................................................. 299
10.4.18 Maintain Unit Of Measure XRef ..................................................................................................... 300
10.4.19 Maintain Reimbursement XRef ...................................................................................................... 301
10.4.20 Maintain Special Handling Codes .................................................................................................. 302
10.4.21 Assign Threshold Driven Special Handling Codes ......................................................................... 303
10.4.22 Maintain High Level Reject Action ................................................................................................. 304
10.4.23 Maintain Account/Withholding Type XRef ...................................................................................... 305
10.5 Enhancements............................................................................................................................................... 306
10.5.1 Maintain Package Size for Process Steps ..................................................................................... 306
10.5.2 Maintain With holding Type Codes ................................................................................................ 308
10.5.3 Maintain Custom High Level Reject Codes.................................................................................... 310
10.5.4 Maintain Custom High Level Reject Action. ................................................................................... 311
10.5.5 Maintain Custom Detail Level Reject Codes .................................................................................. 312
10.6 Accounting Document ................................................................................................................................... 313
10.6.1 Configure Accounting Category ..................................................................................................... 313
10.6.2 Configure Accounting Rules .......................................................................................................... 315
10.6.3 Define Accounting Cycle Control ................................................................................................... 320
10.6.4 Maintain Exception for Post Block ................................................................................................. 321
10.7 Account Receivable ....................................................................................................................................... 322
10.7.1 Configure Accounts Receivable Balance Categories ..................................................................... 322
10.7.2 Configure Account Receivable Queue ........................................................................................... 323
10.7.3 Maintain A/R Write-off Configuration ............................................................................................. 324
10.8 Taxes Payable ............................................................................................................................................... 325
10.8.1 Configure Taxes Payable Queue ................................................................................................... 325
10.8.2 Maintain Taxes Payable Balance Categories ................................................................................ 325
10.8.3 Taxes Payable Write-off Setup ...................................................................................................... 326

11 Tax and Royalty Reporting ............................................................................................... 327

11.1 Maintain Common Number Ranges .............................................................................................................. 327
11.1.1 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 327
11.1.2 Activities......................................................................................................................................... 327
11.1.3 Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 327
11.2 Tax ................................................................................................................................................................ 328
11.2.1 Texas ............................................................................................................................................. 328
11.2.2 Oklahoma ...................................................................................................................................... 342
11.2.3 Wyoming ........................................................................................................................................ 350
11.2.4 New Mexico ................................................................................................................................... 357
11.2.5 Colorado ........................................................................................................................................ 366
11.2.6 Louisiana ....................................................................................................................................... 378

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 10
Configuration Guide

11.2.7 Kansas ........................................................................................................................................... 388

11.2.8 North Dakota.................................................................................................................................. 391
11.3 Royalty .......................................................................................................................................................... 401
11.3.1 Texas ............................................................................................................................................. 401
11.3.2 Wyoming ........................................................................................................................................ 411
11.4 Enhancement ................................................................................................................................................ 423
11.4.1 Maintain Report Types ................................................................................................................... 423
11.4.2 Maintain Report Periods ................................................................................................................ 424
11.4.3 Maintain Report Processes ............................................................................................................ 425
11.4.4 Maintain Process Tabs .................................................................................................................. 426
11.4.5 Maintain Process Types................................................................................................................. 427
11.4.6 Maintain Process Type Tabs ......................................................................................................... 428
11.4.7 Maintain Processes ....................................................................................................................... 429
11.4.8 Maintain Process Steps ................................................................................................................. 431
11.4.9 Maintain Prerequisite Step Status .................................................................................................. 432
11.5 Tax and Royalty Reporting Portal .................................................................................................................. 433
11.5.1 Maintain Report Profiles................................................................................................................. 433
11.5.2 Texas Tax ...................................................................................................................................... 435
11.5.3 Oklahoma Tax ............................................................................................................................... 445
11.5.4 Wyoming Tax ................................................................................................................................. 451
11.5.5 New Mexico ................................................................................................................................... 459
11.5.6 Kansas Tax .................................................................................................................................... 472
11.5.7 Louisiana Tax ................................................................................................................................ 476
11.5.8 North Dakota Tax ........................................................................................................................... 481
11.5.9 Colorado Conservation Tax ........................................................................................................... 486
11.5.10 Colorado Severance Tax ............................................................................................................... 490
11.5.11 Texas Royalty ................................................................................................................................ 492
11.5.12 Wyoming Royalty ........................................................................................................................... 519
11.6 ONRR-2014 Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 540
11.6.1 Maintain Migration Configuration ................................................................................................... 540
11.6.2 Enable Process.............................................................................................................................. 541
11.6.3 Maintain Process Groups............................................................................................................... 542
11.6.4 Maintain ONRR-2014 Number Ranges ......................................................................................... 543
11.6.5 Maintain ONRR-2014 Company Configuration .............................................................................. 546
11.6.6 Maintain Payors ............................................................................................................................. 547
11.6.7 Maintain ONRR Product Code Oil/Gas Indicator XRef .................................................................. 548
11.6.8 Maintain Product Code / ONRR Product Code XRef ..................................................................... 549
11.6.9 Maintain Marketing Type XRef....................................................................................................... 550
11.6.10 Maintain Tribal Lockbox Payments ................................................................................................ 551
11.6.11 Cross-Client Maintenance of File Names and Paths ..................................................................... 552
11.6.12 Maintain Default Reporting Units of Measure ................................................................................ 554
11.6.13 Maintain ONRR-2014 Interest Configuration ................................................................................. 556
11.6.14 Maintain Section 6 Default Rates ................................................................................................... 556
11.6.15 Maintain Sales Type Descriptions .................................................................................................. 557
11.6.16 Maintain Distributee Codes ............................................................................................................ 559
11.6.17 Maintain Custom Validation Error Codes ....................................................................................... 560
11.6.18 Maintain Custom 2014 Edits .......................................................................................................... 561
11.6.19 Maintain Valid Edit Codes Per Transaction Codes ........................................................................ 562
11.6.20 Maintain Additional Dispositions Contract Types ........................................................................... 563
11.6.21 ONRR-2014 Master Data............................................................................................................... 563

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 11
Configuration Guide

12 Regulatory Reporting ........................................................................................................ 568

12.1 Purpose ......................................................................................................................................................... 568
12.2 Preparation .................................................................................................................................................... 568
12.2.1 Prerequisites .................................................................................................................................. 568
12.3 Configuration ................................................................................................................................................. 569
12.3.1 Regulatory Reporting Master Data Setup ...................................................................................... 569
12.3.2 Regulatory Reporting Customizing ................................................................................................ 571
12.3.3 Report Submission Setup .............................................................................................................. 574
12.3.4 PRA to Agency Xref Customizing .................................................................................................. 575
12.3.5 Regulatory Reporting Major Pd Code / Volume Type Mapping ..................................................... 577
12.3.6 MMS OGOR Additonal Settings..................................................................................................... 579
12.3.7 Louisiana (old reporting version) .................................................................................................... 581
12.3.8 BadI: Determine CO2 Percentage for MMS OGOR ....................................................................... 582
12.4 Regulatory Reporting - Master Data Setup .................................................................................................... 583
12.4.1 Purpose ......................................................................................................................................... 583
12.4.2 Master Setup and Report Submission (O3UREP_MASTER) ........................................................ 583
12.4.3 Use ................................................................................................................................................ 583
12.4.4 Adjust MMS Reports (O3UREP_MMS_EDIT) ............................................................................... 585
12.4.5 Maintain Operator and Contact Information (O3UREP_OPERATOR) ........................................... 586
12.4.6 Alternate Maintenace for Measurement Point/State Assigned ID XRef
(O3UCM_TAB_MAINT_012) ......................................................................................................... 587

Configuration Guide – Version 1.4: – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 12
Configuration Guide

1 About This Document

1.1 Authors

Name Company Project Role or Comment

Akshara Pitre SAP Labs India Pvt. Ltd. Author

Shannon Pezzolla SAP Labs India Pvt. Ltd. Author

1.2 Purpose and Scope

This specification provides the outline of the framework for setting up a PRA system from scratch.

1.3 Target Audience

This document is intended for the following target audiences:

• Consultants
• Customers

1.4 Glossary

Term Abbreviation Definition

Business Functions

Business Configuration Sets BC Sets

Quantity Conversion Interface QCI

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 13
Configuration Guide

2 Switch Framework

2.1 Activate Business Functions

2.1.1 Use

Business Functions Sets and Business Functions enable you to use separate components of SAP ERP. Each of
these components are industry-independent applications of Accounting, Logistics, and Human Capital Management
or industry solutions.

In the Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0, the Business Functions are delivered with the enhancement
packages that enable you to implement self-contained business applications separately and to use these to optimize
selected business processes.

A Business Function set is activated when at least one of the related Business Functions is activated. It is
recommended that you activate the Business Function set when you start configuring your system, since the required
industry-specific view of your Implementation Guide created once you have activated the related Business Function.
You could access documentation of the Business Functions that are delivered with the enhancement packages as
shown below
• Refer to the SAP Help Portal (https://help.sap.com) under SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function
Sets and Business Functions. All Business Functions are described there. Using the links to the application
documentation of the Business Functions, you can get detailed information about the content of the Business
Functions.
• In your ECC system, use transaction SFW5 and the links to the documentation of the individual Business
Functions. With these links, you can call up the documentation of the Business Functions in the SAP Help
Portal. You can execute all links to further documentation.
Use the SAP Library connected to your ECC system to get information about the content of the Business
Functions.

There are seven activated Business Functions associated to the Software Component IS-PRA
• /PRA/OIL_PRA_MIG
• /PRA/OIL_PRA_RM1
• /PRA/OIL_PRA_RMY2
• BUSINESS_FUNCTION_BASIS_COM
• OIL_PRA_CI_1
• OIL_PRODUCTION
• OIL_REVENUE_ACCOUNTING

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 14
Configuration Guide

2.1.2 Procedure

Access Business Functions using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → SAP NetWeaver→ Application Server → System Administration → Switch
Framework
OR
Transaction Code: SFW5

Figure 2.1 List of Business Functions

Technical Name of Type of Available Application Dependent Prerequisite

Business Function Business as of Component Business Software
Function Function Component
Requiring
Activation in
Addition

/PRA/OIL_PRA_MIG Industry SAP EhP IS-OIL-PRA Add- Not Relevant

Business 5 for SAP On IS-PRA-XT
Function ERP 6.0

/PRA/OIL_PRA_RM1 Industry SAP EhP IS-OIL-PRA Add- Not Relevant

Business 5 for SAP On IS-PRA-XT
Function ERP 6.0

/PRA/OIL_PRA_RMY2 Industry SAP EhP IS-OIL-PRA Add- Not Relevant

Business 5 for SAP On IS-PRA-XT
Function ERP 6.0

BUSINESS_FUNCTIO Industry SAP EhP Industry Solution Not Relevant SAP_APPL

N_BASIS_COM Business 5 for SAP Oil (IS-OIL) 603
Function ERP 6.0 IS-OIL 603
EA-APPL
603
EA-
GLTRADE

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 15
Configuration Guide

603

OIL_PRA_CI_1 Industry SAP EhP • Upstream • Upstream SAP_APPL

Business 5 for SAP Production Production 605
Function ERP 6.0 Management Management IS-PRA 605
(OIL_PRODU (OIL_PRODU
CTION) CTION)
• Upstream • Upstream
Revenue Revenue
Accounting Accounting
(OIL_REVEN (OIL_REVEN
UE_ACCOUN UE_ACCOUN
TING) TING)

OIL _PRODUCTION Industry SAP ERP Production and Not Relevant SAP _APPL
Business 6.0 Revenue 600
Function Accounting (IS- OIL IS- OIL 600
–PRA-PRD)

OIL Industry SAP ERP Production and Not Relevant SAP _APPL
_REVENUE_ACCOU Business 6.0 Revenue 600
NTING Function Accounting (IS- OIL IS- OIL 600
–PRA-REV)

Note
• For a new installation, i.e. new customer the following business function activations are not required:
o /PRA/OIL_PRA_MIG
o /PRA/OIL_PRA_RM1
o OIL_PRA_CI_1
• For existing customer refer to the note 2040660 which contains information about migration from old table to
new tables.

2.1.3 Business Functions Utility

2.1.3.1 /PRA/OIL_PRA_MIG

Business Function is used to migrate from the existing core SAP Production and Revenue Accounting (Razorfish
Data Model) to the new SAP Production and Revenue Accounting (Revenue Accounting data model). In the new data
model, Tax, Marketing and, Deducts are stored along with their respective codes instead of using positions and
buckets. ERP core elements like Company, Customer, and Vendor are reused to reduce mapping efforts.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 16
Configuration Guide

2.1.3.1.1 Prerequisites

For successful migration, the following sub-modules of SAP Production and Revenue Accounting have to be
migrated as well:
• Company and Accounts
• Business Associate
• Check Input
• Journal Entry
• Accounts Receivable
• Taxes Payable
• Payment Processing
• Prior Period Notification
• Revenue Distribution
• Escheat and Escrow
• ONRR
• Tax and Royalty
• Annual Reporting

You can continue using the old transactions during the migration phase. All migration programs can be accessed by
entering the transaction code: /PRA/MIG_NEW_MODEL.

2.1.3.2 /PRA/OIL_PRA_RM1

As of SAP PRA SECOND GEN 1.0 (for ERP 6.0 EhP5 and higher), Business Function (/PRA/OIL_PRA_RM1: PRA
Road Map Year 1 (PP, ONRR, CA, Production Enhancements and Innovations)) is available.

It contains a new payment process and supplementary reporting version in the Process or Tax 2.0 framework with
better process control for:
• Tax Reporting – Replaces the old tax reporting
o North Dakota Tax Reporting
o Colorado Severance Tax Reporting
o Louisiana Tax Reporting
o Colorado Conservation Tax Reporting
o Kansas Tax Reporting
• Annual Tax Withholding Reporting (1099)
• Payment Processing – Replaces Check Write
• Office of Natural Resources Revenue – Replaces MMS 2014
• Contractual Allocations – Extended rounding rules to consider partners with small interest
• Responsibility Area – New concept of responsibility assignment, which is used in Payment Processing and
ONRR

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 17
Configuration Guide

• Coal bed Methane - Well completion can be categorized as coal bed methane well for regulatory reporting
purpose
• API well numbers enhancement
• Check Input – Minor usability enhancement

2.1.3.3 /PRA/OIL_PRA_RMY2

With the activation of this Business Function, all legacy master data transactions are available only in display mode
and (JE) account postings are disabled. The transaction in the following modules have been replaced to be
streamlined and incorporated the new data model:
• Check Input
• Business Associate
• Journal Entry
• Accounts Receivable
• Taxes Payable
• Revenue Distribution
• Tax and Royalty
• Escheat and Escrow
• Following are new and activated features for business functions:
• Marketing Free Enhancements
• Settlement Diversity handling
• Dual Accounting
• Prior Period Notification Workplace
• Delivery Network Workplace
• VL Formula Calculation Report
• Archiving of Revenue Accounting Documents and Valuation Documents
• Simple Gas Plant Analysis
• Valuation of Network Imbalance

There are more changes related to the data model, as listed below:
• SAP Production and Revenue Accounting company codes have been replaced with standard ERP company
code.
• Taxes position, marketing buckets, and deducts have now been split into child tables so that all the amounts are
stored with the corresponding codes.
• All RazorFish data elements have been removed, which led to leading zeroes being added.
• Removed business associate with core customer vendor.
• All business processes from Payment Processing to Tax and Royalty Reports have consistent UI, that is, they
use Process 2.0 framework.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 18
Configuration Guide

2.1.3.4 BUSINESS_FUNCTION_BASIS_COM

This Business Function is activated automatically as soon as any one of the following Business Function Sets are
activated:
• SAP Oil & Gas
• SAP Oil & Gas with Utilities
• SAP Mining
• SAP Mining with Utilities
• SAP Chemicals
This Business Function is also the prerequisite for activating all the other Business Functions in the above-mentioned
set.

2.1.3.5 OIL_PRA_CI_1

This Business Function can be used for extending the existing portfolio of functions in the areas of:
• Accounts Receivable Reconciliation
• Settlement Statement - Value and Post
• Product Balancing
• Production Regulatory Reporting
• Valuation document creation and processing
• PRA- Financial Accounting (FI) integration.

2.1.3.6 OIL_PRODUCTION

This Business Function provides the following functions:

• Production
• Measurement System
• Production Regulatory Reporting
• PRA Tools
o Upstream Graphics
o Partitioned Data Management
• PRA Archiving

2.1.3.7 OIL_REVENUE_ACCOUNTING

This Business Function provides the following functions:

• Sales and Balancing:

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 19
Configuration Guide

o Product Control
o Contractual Allocation
o Balancing Workplace
• Ownership
• Revenue Accounting:
o Valuation
o Check Input
o Payment Processing
o Check Write
o Journal Entry
o Accounts Receivable
o Revenue Distribution
o Contracts and Pricing
• Tax Reporting
• Royalty Reporting
• PRA Tools
o Partitioned Data Management
• PRA Archiving

2.2 Business Configuration Sets (BCS)

2.2.1 Use

Customizing settings can be collected by processes into Business Configuration Sets (BC Sets). BC Sets make
Customizing more transparent by documenting and analyzing the Customizing settings. They can also be used for a
group rollout, where the Customizing settings are bundled by the group headquarters and passed on in a structured
way to its subsidiaries.

BC Sets are provided by SAP for selected industry sectors, and customers can create their own.

When a BC Set is created, values and combinations of values are copied from the original Customizing tables into
the BC Set and can be copied into tables, views and view clusters in the customer system. The BC Sets are always
transported into the customer system in which Customizing is performed. The loading of BC Sets is logged by the
system, that is, which BC Set was copied when into the system, and any errors which occurred. This information is
significant for Continuous Change and Upgrade.

The settings in the BC Set can be compared with the system data using the Customizing Cross-System Viewer, to
check the consistency of the data.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 20
Configuration Guide

Advantages of using BC Sets

• Efficient group rollout
• Industry sector systems are easier to create and maintain
• Customizing can be performed at a business level
• Change Management is quicker and safer
• Upgrade is simpler

BC Set ID BC Set Description Software Release

Component

/PRA/FF ONRR Field Fuels RMONRR 100

/PRA/KS_PORTGRP BC set for Port Group IS-PRA-XT 200

/PRA/PAYMENT_PROCESSING Payment Processing IS-PRA-XT 100

/PRA/REG_RPT_FIELDS Reg reports fields IS-PRA-XT 100

/PRA/TEMP_ONRR_2014 ONRR-2014 - Temporary IS-PRA-XT 100

/PRA/TEMP_PAYMENT_PROCESSING Payment Processing - Temporary IS-PRA-XT 100

/PRA/WH BC Set for Withholding IS-PRA-XT 200

OIUE1 Legal Suspense Summary IS-PRA 600

OIUE2 Process 2.0 IS-PRA 600

OIUGR Generic Reporting PRAGENR 200

OIUT5 Tax 2.0 - OKGP15 IS-PRA 605

OIUX5_OKGP Tax 2.0 - Oklahoma Gross Production Tax OKTAX 600

Report

OIUX6_WY Tax 2.0 - Wyoming Severance & Conservation SAP_BASIS 700

Tax

OIUX7 Tax 2.0 - WYGP WYTAX 600

OIUYA_CO Generic Colorado Reporting PRAGENR 200

2.2.2 Procedure

1. Access Business Functions using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SAP Easy Access Menu

IMG Menu Tools → Customizing → Business Configuration Sets → Activation

OR
Transaction Code: SFP20

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 21
Configuration Guide

2. Enter the name of the BC Set that you want to activate.

3. Choose Bus.Conf.Set → Activate or the Activate pushbutton.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 22
Configuration Guide

3 Core Data Setup

3.1 Company Code

3.1.1 Use

You use this procedure to maintain Company Code. PRA uses the standard ERP Company maintained information.
You can maintain company information at the following location in SPRO transaction (Enterprise Structure →
Definition → Financial Accounting → Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code).

3.2 Material Master

3.2.1 Use

You use this procedure to maintain Material information. PRA uses the standard ERP MM0 transaction to maintain
Material information. Key information that is used by PRA is the Unit of Measure information.

3.3 Sales Area/Cost Centers/Profit Centers

3.3.1 Sales Area

3.3.1.1 Use

You use this procedure to maintain Sales Area information. PRA uses the standard ERP transaction for Sales Area
setup.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 23
Configuration Guide

3.3.2 Cost Centers

3.3.2.1 Use

You use this procedure to maintain Cost Center information. PRA uses the standard ERP KS01 transaction to
maintain information.

3.3.3 Profit Center

3.3.3.1 Use

You use this procedure to maintain Profit Center information. PRA uses the standard ERP KE51 transaction to
maintain information.

3.4 Joint Venture Accounting

3.4.1 Use

You use this procedure to maintain Joint Venture information. PRA uses the standard ERP GJVV transaction to
maintain Joint Venture information.

3.5 Chart of Accounts

3.5.1 Use

Use this procedure to maintain the Account used by PRA revenue modules.

3.5.2 Prerequisite

An account is maintained in the FI module using FS00 transaction.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 24
Configuration Guide

3.5.3 Procedure

1. From SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → accounting document→ Master Data→ Chart of Accounts.

2. Click Create button.

3. Enter the company, Account and Account type.

4. Save your entry.

3.5.4 Account Entry Control

3.5.4.1 Use

Use this procedure to link Account attributes to a specific Accounting Category. This allows you to create more than
one Account per Account Category.

You can create a new account, differentiated by the parameters you set in Account Category Customizing:
• State
• Entity Type
• Product
• Interest Type
• Contract Type
• Volume Type
• Severance Tax Type
• Marketing Cost Type
• Property Interest
• Affiliated Company

The data on this screen will be defaulted from Account Category Customizing, and will display the Account Category
attributes that were defined for the Account ID / Account Category combination.

3.5.4.2 Prerequisite

An account is maintained in the PRA chart account using /PRA/COA transaction.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 25
Configuration Guide

3.5.4.3 Procedure

1. From SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Accounting Document→ Master Data→ Account Entry Control.

2. On the Account Entry Control: Initial screen, enter the relevant data and select Create. The system displays the
Account Entry Control – Create screen.

3. Enter the relevant data and either Default, Property/DOI Override, or Owner Override.

4. Save your entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 26
Configuration Guide

4 Infrastructure Setup

4.1 Quantity Conversion Interface (QCI) Configuration

4.1.1 Define QCI Parameters

4.1.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can display parameters that can be passed to the Quantity Conversion Interface (QCI). To be
able to use parameters in the QCI, you must declare the parameters in this table.

Standard settings
You cannot change the set of parameters delivered by SAP, but you can define your own new parameters in the
customer namespace. These parameters can then also be used to define new reading groups.

4.1.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings→ Quantity Conversion Interface
(QCI) Configuration→ Define QCI Parameters

Use the reference below and the F1 help to maintain the required entries in the table.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 27
Configuration Guide

Figure 4.1 QCI Parameters Overview

4.1.2 Activate SAP Conversion Routines for Natural

Gas

4.1.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you activate the relevant Conversion Routines.

In order to use the SAP Conversion Routines for Natural Gas, you have to first activate them. By activating them, you
agree to the following statement:

The SAP conversion routines for natural gas are provided "as is" and SAP does not warrant that results derived from
their use will be 100 % error-free. Any results derived from the use of the SAP conversion routines for natural gas will

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 28
Configuration Guide

need to be checked by you using the procedure outlined under "activities" below. SAP is not liable for any damages
arising out of your non-compliance with, or improper execution of said checking requirements.

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

4.1.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings→ Quantity Conversion
Interface (QCI) Configuration→ Activate SAP Conversion Routines for Natural Gas

Figure 4.2 Activate SAP Natural Gas Conversion Routines

4.1.3 Define Conversion Group and External Function

Module Settings

4.1.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you create Conversion Groups, assign external function calls to the Conversion Groups, and link
a reading group to the Conversion Group.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 29
Configuration Guide

Conversion Group definition

The Conversion Group defines the conversion routines (C-code routines or ABAP function modules) that will be used
in the quantity conversion calculations. By assigning a Conversion Group to a material in the material master record,
you activate the material for quantity conversion calculations.

Standard settings
The standard Conversion Groups are those that reference C-code routines that perform quantity conversion
calculations based on API tables 5 & 6, 23 & 24, 53 & 54, and 59 & 60. Those are delivered as a standard
configuration with the IS-Oil system.

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

4.1.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings→ Quantity Conversion
Interface (QCI) Configuration→ Define Conversion Group and External Function
Module Settings

For the different Conversion Groups you can maintain the path for external function calls, link reading group to
function calls and other entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 30
Configuration Guide

Figure 4.3 Conversion Group Definition Overview

The screenshot shows the reference for Conversion Group 56A, the external function call in in reference system. The
value should be maintained as per you QCI system.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 31
Configuration Guide

Figure 4.4 External Function Calls and Sequence Overview

4.1.4 Configure Message Handling

4.1.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define whether Messages within the QCI appear as errors, warnings, or information
messages. Any entry will overwrite the standard SAP default message handling for the messages allowed to be
modified.

The following Messages can be customized:

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

4.1.4.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings→ Quantity Conversion Interface
(QCI) Configuration→ Configure Message Handling

For the different Conversion Groups you can maintain the path for external function calls, link reading group to
function calls and other entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 32
Configuration Guide

Figure 4.5 Message Control by User Overview

4.1.5 Define Physical Properties for Natural Gas

Components

4.1.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can maintain various Physical Properties data for any number of components of natural gas.
The components are specified with their parameter ID defined in table OIB07 (Define QCI parameters).

Several data sets can be maintained. Each set is characterized by its units of measure, which are valid for all the
entries in the detail screen for each component.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 33
Configuration Guide

Standard settings
The design of this table is based on GPA Standard 2145-00 "Table of Physical Constants for Hydrocarbons and other
Compounds of Interest of the Natural Gas Industry". SAP does not deliver individual table entries. You have to
maintain your own entries using your own copy or any other applicable standard.

Further notes
Note that the units of measure are specified for various properties in the header segment for each set. This may
require a conversion of a constant from a unit of measure given in a printed standard.

Example
For the heating value, it is possible to define exactly one unit of measure for each set. All heating values have to be
maintained for this unit of measure. The system can always convert between different units of measure.

4.1.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings→ Quantity Conversion
Interface (QCI) Configuration→ Define Physical Properties for Natural Gas
Components

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 34
Configuration Guide

Header Data

Figure 4.6 Header Data: Units and Base Conditions

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 35
Configuration Guide

Detail Data

Figure 4.7 Details: Component Data Overview

4.2 Logical and Physical file directory/path setup

4.2.1 Use

This activity (transaction FILE) is for cross-client maintenance of logical filenames and file paths and includes the
following:
• Logical file path definition
• Assignment of physical paths to logical path
• Logical file name definition, cross-client
• Definition of variables
• Syntax group definition
• Assignment of operating system to syntax group

Choose one of these in the navigation areas of the screen to see the corresponding view of the values to be
maintained. You can examine existing entries and enter new values. Depending on the data you need to maintain,

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 36
Configuration Guide

you can either work in the overview or you may need to go to the details view by pressing F2 or the Details
pushbutton in the application toolbar.

Note
Release 3.0C introduces cross-client logical filename maintenance. In addition to cross-client maintenance
you can still choose to maintain filenames for a specific client. You must maintain a logical filename across
clients before you can maintain it for one client. Then you can maintain it for particular clients as required.
Use program RSFILE01 to transfer filenames from the client-specific maintenance (available before Release
3.0C) to cross-client maintenance. Client-specific data is not affected.

4.2.2 Activities

• Verify that existing definitions meet your needs.

• Change the definitions (and, if necessary, the structure of your file system).
• If necessary, define additional filenames and paths.

4.2.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Cross-Client Maintenance of File Names and Paths

2. Select node Logical File Path Definition and click New Entries.

3. Enter the Logical file path and its Name. Save the entry.

4. Select the newly created entry. Expand the node Logical File Path Definition and double-click the child node
Assignment of Physical Paths to Logical Path.

5. Click New Entries. For the logical path created, enter the Syntax Group and the Physical Path. Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 37
Configuration Guide

Figure 4.8 Logical File Path Definition Overview

Figure 4.9 Assignment of Physical Paths to Logical Path Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 38
Configuration Guide

5 PRA Global Settings

5.1 Number Ranges

5.1.1 Regulatory/Production Reporting

5.1.1.1 Maintain Number Ranges

5.1.1.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain Number Ranges that you want to use in your system.

5.1.1.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

SAP R/3 Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →
Regulatory/Production Reporting → Maintain Number Ranges

On Defining Number Range Interval screen, make the following entries. These are suggestive ranges.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 39
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.1 Defining Number Ranges

5.1.2 Production

5.1.2.1 Number Range Group for Platforms

5.1.2.1.1 Use

In this IMG Activity, you configure the Number Ranges used in the assignment of Platform IDs in the Create Platform
transaction. Ranges can be set for Internal assignment, in which the system generates a number for the Platform, or
for External assignment, which allows you to specify a number for the Platform.

5.1.2.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Groups →
Define Number Range Groups for Platform

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 40
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.2 PRA: Platform Group Codes Overview

Provisions are there to maintain Number Range both internally and externally.

5.1.2.2 Number Range Group for Field

5.1.2.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Number Rages used in the assignment of Field IDs in the Create Field
transaction. Ranges can be set for Internal assignment, in which the system generates a number for the Field, or for
External assignment, which allows you to specify a number for the Field.

5.1.2.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Groups →
Define Number Range Groups for Field

Figure 5.3 PRA: Field Group Codes Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 41
Configuration Guide

Provisions are there to maintain Number Range both internally and externally.

5.1.2.3 Number Range Group for Reservoir

5.1.2.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Number Ranges used in the assignment of Reservoir IDs in the Create
Reservoir transaction. Ranges can be set for Internal assignment in which the system generates a number for the
Reservoir, or for External assignment, which allows you to specify a number for the Reservoir.

5.1.2.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Groups →
Define Number Range Groups for Reservoir

Figure 5.4 PRA: Reservoir Group Codes Overview

Provisions are there to maintain Number Range both internally and externally.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 42
Configuration Guide

5.1.2.4 Number Range for Group Well

5.1.2.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Number Ranges used in the assignment of Well IDs in the Create Well
transaction. Ranges can be set for Internal assignment in which the system generates a number for the Well, or for
External assignment, which allows you to specify a number for the Well.

5.1.2.4.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Groups →
Define Number Range Groups for Well

Figure 5.5 PRA: Well Group Codes Overview

Provisions are there to maintain Number Range both internally and externally.

5.1.2.5 Number Range Group for Measurement Point

5.1.2.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Number Ranges used in the assignment of Measurement Point IDs in the
Create Measurement Point transaction. Ranges can be set for Internal assignment in which the system generates a
number for the Measurement Point, or for External assignment, which allows you to specify a number for a
Measurement Point.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 43
Configuration Guide

5.1.2.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Groups →
Define Number Range Groups for Measurement Point

Figure 5.6 PRA: MP Group Codes Overview

Provisions are there to maintain Number Range both internally and externally.

5.1.2.6 Number Range group for Delivery Network

5.1.2.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Number Ranges used in the assignment of Delivery Network IDs in the Create
Delivery Network transaction. Ranges can be set for Internal assignment, in which the system generates a number
for the Delivery Network, or for External assignment, which allows a user to specify a number for the Delivery
Network.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 44
Configuration Guide

5.1.2.6.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Groups →
Define Number Range Groups for Delivery Network

Figure 5.7 PRA: DN Group Codes Overview

Provisions are there to maintain Number Range both internally and externally.

5.1.3 Contractual Allocation

5.1.3.1 Use

Use this transaction to maintain system Number Range Intervals in Contractual Allocation.

For some tables SAP suggests a certain Number Range which the system displays in the Sugg From and Sugg To
columns.

Caution
While each SAP customer has the option to set Number Ranges as they see fit, if a customer does not enter
the suggested entries for a range set with the system indicator (Syst NRIV), the system may not operate
properly!

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 45
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas(PRA)→ Sales & Balancing→ Maintain Number
Ranges

Review the status of the Number Range Interval in the Status column. When the system displays a yellow or red
symbol in the Status column, the Number Range requires maintenance. For example, if you specify a Number Range
different than a suggested Number Range, the system displays a yellow triangle in the Status column. If there is a
yellow or red symbol in the Status column, then maintain the Number Range.

To make the Number Range entries, choose Maintain Number Range Interval.

To assign a Number Range Interval to a table, choose Maintain Configuration. At the Change View Number Range
Interval Assignments to PRA Tables: Overview screen, specify the number range interval in the No field.

Choose Transport Num Range Intervals as required to transport a Number Range.

Note
If the indicator is selected in the Syst NRIV column, then there is a corresponding number range that SAP
suggests you use.

Caution
If you do not enter a suggested range, the system may not operate properly!

Further Notes
Every time a new client is added to the system, you must create new Number Range Intervals for that client.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 46
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.8 Maintain Number Ranges

5.1.3.3 Percent Returned to Producer Header Data

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.9 Number Range Interval Assignments - Producer Header Data

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 47
Configuration Guide

Maintain Number Range Intervals – B1

Figure 5.10 Number Range Intervals - Producer Header Data

5.1.3.4 Sliding Scale Detail

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.11 Number Range Interval Assignments - Sliding Scale Detail

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 48
Configuration Guide

Maintain Number Range Intervals – B2

Figure 5.12 Number Range Intervals - Sliding Scale Detail

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 49
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.5 Availability Group Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.13 Number Range Interval Assignments - Availability Group Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals – C5

Figure 5.14 Number Range Intervals - Availability Group Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 50
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.6 Sales Point Adjustments

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.15 Number Range Interval Assignments - Sales Point Adjustments

Maintain Number Range Intervals – C6

Figure 5.16 Number Range Intervals - Sales Point Adjustments

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 51
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.7 Allocation Cross Reference Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.17 Number Range Interval Assignments - Allocation Cross Reference Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 70

Figure 5.18 Number Range Intervals - Allocation Cross Reference Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 52
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.8 Availability Detail

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.19 Number Range Interval Assignments - Availability Detail

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 61

Figure 5.20 Number Range Intervals - Availability Detail

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 53
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.9 Availability Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.21 Number Range Interval Assignments - Availability Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals – 60

Figure 5.22 Number Range Intervals - Availability Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 54
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.10 Contract Volumes by Measurement Point Gas

Detail

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.23 Number Range Interval Assignments - Contract Volumes by Measurement Point Gas Detail

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 55
Configuration Guide

Maintain Number Range Intervals – 03

Figure 5.24 Number Range Intervals - Contract Volumes by Measurement Point Gas Detail

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 56
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.11 Contract Volumes by Measurement Point

Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.25 Number Range Interval Assignments - Contract Volumes by Measurement Point Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 47

Figure 5.26 Number Range Intervals - Contract Volumes by Measurement Point Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 57
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.12 Capacity Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.27 Number Range Interval Assignments - Capacity Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 48

Figure 5.28 Number Range Intervals - Capacity Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 58
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.13 Observed Conditions

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.29 Number Range Interval Assignments - Observed Conditions

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 79

Figure 5.30 Number Range Intervals - Observed Conditions

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 59
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.14 Daily Availability

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.31 Number Range Interval Assignments - Daily Availability

Maintain Number Range Intervals – 80

Figure 5.32 Number Range Intervals - Daily Availability

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 60
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.15 Gas Control Monthly Volume Fluctuations Table

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.33 Number Range Interval Assignments - Gas Control Monthly Volume Fluctuations

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 49

Figure 5.34 Number Range Intervals - Gas Control Monthly Volume Fluctuations

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 61
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.16 Marketing Group Determination Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.35 Number Range Intervals - Marketing Group Determination Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 44

Figure 5.36 Number Range Intervals - Marketing Group Determination Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 62
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.17 Owner Availability Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.37 Number Range Interval Assignments - Owner Availability Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 02

Figure 5.38 Number Range Intervals - Owner Availability Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 63
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.18 Outside Operated Residual Contract Header

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.39 Number Range Interval Assignments - Outside-Operated Residual Contract Header

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 50

Figure 5.40 Number Range Interval Assignments - Outside-Operated Residual Contract Header

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 64
Configuration Guide

5.1.3.19 Product Balancing Agreement

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.41 Number Range Interval Assignment - Product Balancing Agreement

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 65
Configuration Guide

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 76

Figure 5.41 Number Range Intervals - Product Balancing Agreement

5.1.4 Balancing Statement

5.1.4.1 Use

Use this activity to maintain system Number Range Intervals for the Balancing application area. You must maintain
the intervals in order to begin using Balancing.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 66
Configuration Guide

Recommendation

For the Balancing Report Header System Number Range, SAP suggests the Number Range that the system displays
in the Sugg From and Sugg To columns. The system uses this Number Range internally when generating report
runs. These numbers will not be seen by a user.

Caution
While each SAP customer has the option to set Number Ranges as they see fit, if a customer does not enter
the suggested entries for a range set with the system indicator (Syst NRIV), the system may not operate
properly!

5.1.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas(PRA)→ Sales & Balancing → Balancing
Statement → Maintain Number Ranges

2. Review the status of the Number Range Interval in the Status column. When the system displays a yellow or red
symbol in the Status column, the Number Range requires maintenance. For example, if you specify a Number
Range different than a suggested Number Range, the system displays a yellow triangle in the Status column. If
there is a yellow or red symbol in the Status column, then maintain the Number Range.

3. To make the Number Range entries, choose Maintain Number Range Interval.

4. To assign a Number Range Interval to a table, choose Maintain Configuration. At the Change View Number
Range Interval Assignments to PRA Tables: Overview screen, specify the Number Range Interval in the No field.

5. Choose Transport Num Range Intervals as required to transport a Number Range.

Note
If the indicator is selected in the Syst NRIV column, then there is a corresponding number range that SAP
suggests you use.

Caution
If you do not enter a suggested range, the system may not operate properly!

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 67
Configuration Guide

Further Notes
Every time a new client is added to the system, you must create new Number Range Intervals for that client.

5.1.4.3 Product Balancing Agreement Number - Internal

Figure 5.42 Product Balancing Agreement Number - Internal

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.43 Number Range Interval Assignments - Product Balancing Agreement Number - Internal

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 68
Configuration Guide

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 01

Figure 5.44 Number Range Intervals - Product Balancing Agreement Number - Internal

5.1.4.4 Product Balancing Agreement Number -

External

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.45 Number Range Interval Assignments - Product Balancing Agreement Number - External

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 69
Configuration Guide

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 02

Figure 5.46 Number Range Intervals - Product Balancing Agreement Number - External

5.1.4.5 Balancing Report Header System Number

Maintain Configuration

Figure 5.47 Number Range Interval Assignments - Balancing Report Header System Number

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 70
Configuration Guide

Maintain Number Range Intervals - 01

Figure 5.48 Number Range Intervals - Balancing Report Header System Number

5.1.5 Ownership

5.1.5.1 Maintain System Number Range Intervals for

Ownership

5.1.5.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the System Number Range Intervals for the Ownership component. The System
Numbers are internally utilized throughout PRA and are critical to the functioning of the software. Please maintain the
Number Range objects for the following:
• Ownership History
• Unit to Tract Participation
• RD DOI Transfer Changes
• Sliding Scale Header
• Bearer Group Use Control
• Division of Interest Ownership
• DOI Accounting

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 71
Configuration Guide

5.1.5.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Maintain System Number Range
Intervals for Ownership

2. Execute the Transaction.

Figure 5.49 Maintain System Number Range Intervals for Ownership

3. Click all the line items one by one and maintain the Number Range Intervals.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 72
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.50 Maintain Number Range Intervals

Figure 5.51 Number Range Interval Assignments

5.1.6 Valuation

5.1.6.1 Maintain Number Range for Valuation Document

5.1.6.1.1 Use

Use this transaction to maintain system Number Range Intervals.

In some instances SAP suggests a certain Number Range which the system displays in the Sugg From and Sugg To
columns.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 73
Configuration Guide

Caution
While each SAP customer has the option to set Number Ranges as they see fit, if a customer does not enter
the suggested entries for a range set with the system indicator (Syst NRIV), the system may not operate
properly!

Activities
• Review the status of the Number Range interval in the Status column. When the system displays a yellow or red
symbol in the Status column, the Number Range requires maintenance. For example, if you specify a Number
Range different than a suggested Number Range, the system displays a yellow triangle in the Status column. If
there is a yellow or red symbol in the Status column, then maintain the Number Range.

• To make the Number Range entries, choose Maintain Number Range Interval.

• To assign a Number Range Interval to a table, choose Maintain Configuration. At the Change View Number
Range Interval Assignments to PRA Tables: Overview screen, specify the number range interval in the No field.

• Choose Transport Num Range Intervals as required to transport a number range.

Note
If the indicator is selected in the Syst NRIV column, then there is a corresponding Number Range that SAP
suggests you use.

Caution
If you do not enter a suggested range, the system may not operate properly!

5.1.6.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Valuation → Maintain
Number Range For Valuation Document

Click all the line items one by one and maintain the Number Range intervals.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 74
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.52 Maintain Number Range for Valuation Document

5.1.6.2 Maintain Number Range for Settlement

Statement

5.1.6.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity you maintain system Number Range Intervals for Settlement Statements.

In some instances SAP suggests a certain number range which the system displays in the Sugg From and Sugg To
columns.

Caution
While each SAP customer has the option to set Number Ranges as they see fit, if a customer does not enter
the suggested entries for a range set with the system indicator (Syst NRIV), the system may not operate
properly!

Activities
• Use this activity to maintain Number Range Intervals for Settlement Statements. You must maintain these
intervals in order to begin using settlement statements.

• Review the status of the Number Range interval in the Status column. When the system displays a yellow or red
symbol in the Status column, the Number Range requires maintenance. For example, if you specify a Number
Range different than a suggested Number Range, the system displays a yellow triangle in the Status column. If
there is a yellow or red symbol in the Status column, then maintain the Number Range.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 75
Configuration Guide

• To make the Number Range entries, choose Maintain Number Range Interval.

• To assign a Number Range Interval to a table, choose Maintain Configuration. At the Change View Number
Range Interval Assignments to PRA Tables: Overview screen, specify the Number Range Interval in the No
field.

• Choose Transport Num Range Intervals as required to transport a number range.

Note
If the indicator is selected in the Syst NRIV column, then there is a corresponding Number Range that SAP
suggests you use.

Caution
If you do not enter a suggested range, the system may not operate properly!

5.1.6.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Valuation → Maintain
Number Range For Valuation Document

Click all the line items one by one and maintain the Number Range Intervals.

Figure 5.53 Maintain Number Range for Settlement Statement

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 76
Configuration Guide

5.1.7 Check Input

5.1.7.1 Maintain Product Code Price Range

5.1.7.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Check Input →
Maintain Product code price range For Check Input Document

On Defining Number Range Interval screen, make the following entries:

Figure 5.54 Defining Number Range Interval

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 77
Configuration Guide

5.1.8 Payment Processing

5.1.8.1 Define Number Ranges for Checks

5.1.8.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace processing → Process specific
configuration → Payment Processing → Define number ranges for checks

Figure 5.55 Change Check Number Status

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 78
Configuration Guide

5.1.9 Maintain Common Number Ranges

5.1.9.1 Use

Use this activity to maintain Number Ranges for different Objects and Logical tables for the Change document.

5.1.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → General Configuration
→ Maintain Common Number Ranges

2. Maintain it at Object level and at Different Logical table’s level.

Figure 5.56 Maintain Common Number Ranges

Figure 5.57 Number Range Interval Assignments

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 79
Configuration Guide

5.1.10 Maintain Number Range Groups

It is often necessary to directly access individual records in a data structure. This is done using unique keys. Number
Ranges are used to assign numbers to individual database records for a commercial object, to complete the key.

The numbers provide, apart from unique identification of a data record, the possibility of encoding differentiating
information for an object. The ERP system also has a Number Range Management which monitors the number
status, so that numbers which have already been issued are not re-issued.

A commercial object for which part of the key is to be generated using number ranges, is defined as a Number Range
object in the SAP system. The commercial object can contain sub-objects and can either have only one Number
Range (External or Internal) or two Number Ranges (External and Internal).

A Number Range contains a Number Range interval with a fixed character set. The Number Range interval consists
of numeric or alphanumeric characters, and is delimited by the field from number, and to number. The Number Range
number identifies a Number Range for the system and makes system-internal access to the Number Range interval
possible. If financial years are to be distinguished from one another in the number assignment, there can be several
intervals (one for each year).

In a Number Range, a set of characters or numbers is defined. Number Ranges can be either Internally or Externally
defined. When the system automatically defines the Number Range, it is considered Internal and when the number
have to be assigned manually by the user, the Range is considered to be External. For each Number Range, there is
a Number Range Number. Number Range Objects are used to represent specific objects with Number Ranges. Each
Number Range object can be defined and more than one Number Range can be assigned to it. The Number Range
Object contains all definitions (such as the Warning Percentage, at which the user is warned that numbers are
running out) which are needed for the number assignment for the commercial object.

For each Number Range:

• There is an assigned Number Range Number.
• The Number Range Interval determines the character set.
• The character set can be either numeric or alphanumeric.
• Each Number Range has from and to field entries, which determine the range.

In IS-OIL-PRA, following Number Range Groups are configured in SPRO:

• Number Range Group for Platform
• Number Range Group for Field
• Number Range Group for Reservoir
• Number Range Group for Well
• Number Range Group for Measurement Point
• Number Range Group for Delivery Network

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 80
Configuration Guide

5.1.10.1 Maintain Common Number Range Groups

5.1.10.1.1 Use

Use this transaction to maintain Number Range intervals for the majority of the PRA tables.

For some tables SAP suggests a certain Number Range, which the system displays in the Sugg From and Sugg To
columns.

Caution
While each SAP customer has the option to set Number Ranges as they see fit, if a customer does not enter
the suggested entries for a range set with the system indicator (Syst NRIV), the system may not operate
properly!

It serves the following activities:

• Review the status of the Number Range Interval in the Status column. When the system displays a yellow or red
symbol in the Status column, the Number Range requires maintenance. For example, if you specify a Number
Range different from a suggested Number Range, the system displays a yellow triangle in the Status column.

• To create/change the Number Range Intervals, choose Maintain Number Range Interval.

• To assign a Number Range Interval to a table, choose Maintain Configuration. At the Change View Number
Range Interval Assignments to PRA Tables: Overview screen, specify the Number Range Interval in the No
field.

• Choose Transport Num Range Intervals as required to transport a Number Range.

• Note that if the indicator is selected in the Syst NRIV column, then there is a corresponding Number Range that
SAP suggests you use.

5.1.10.1.2 Procedure

nsaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Process 2.0 → General Configuration →
Maintain Common Number Ranges
OR
Transaction Code: O5UCM_SN_SR

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 81
Configuration Guide

4. You can maintain it at Object level and at Different Logical table’s level like the following:

Figure 5.58 Options for Maintaining Number Ranges

If you click Maintain Number Range Interval ( ):

Figure 5.59 Defining Number Range Intervals

If you click Maintain Configuration at Logical Table Level ( ):

Figure 5.60 Overview of Assigned Number Ranges

5. Now, you can save and exit from the Maintenance screen.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 82
Configuration Guide

5.1.11 Maintain Number Range Intervals

5.1.11.1 Interval Maintenance for Revenue Accounting

Integration Turned ON

5.1.11.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you to turn Number Range Interval maintenance ON in PRA-Production on your system.

5.1.11.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Intervals
→ Interval Maintenance For Revenue Accounting Integration Turned ON

2. You can maintain it at the object level and at different logical table’s level:

Figure 5.61 Interval Maintenance for Revenue Accounting Integration Turned ON

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 83
Configuration Guide

If you click Maintain Number Range Interval ( ):

Figure 5.62 Defining Number Range Intervals

If you click Maintain Configuration at Logical Table Level ( ):

Figure 5.63 Viewining Assigned Number Range Intervals

5.1.11.2 Interval Maintenance for Revenue Accounting

Integration Turned OFF

5.1.11.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you turn Number Range Interval maintenance OFF for PRA-Production, on your system.

5.1.11.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Intervals →
Interval Maintenance For Revenue Accounting Integration Turned ON

2. You can maintain it at the object level and at different logical table’s level.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 84
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.64 Interval Maintenance for Revenue Accounting Integration Turned OFF

If you click Maintain Number Range Interval ( ):

1. Enter External or Internal in the Subobject popup.

Figure 5.65 Entering Subobject Popup

2. Press Enter.

Figure 5.66 Defining Number Range Intervals

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 85
Configuration Guide

If you click Maintain Configuration at Logical Table Level ( ):

Figure 5.67 Viewing Assigned Number Range Intervals

No logical table is linked yet.

5.1.11.3 Interval Maintenance (General)

5.1.11.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain Number Range Intervals on your system for PRA-Production.
For some tables, SAP suggests a certain Number Range, which the system displays in the Sugg From and Sugg To
columns on the screen.

Caution
If the flag in the Syst. NRIV column is set, this indicates that there is already a number range that SAP
suggests you use (if you do not use the suggested range, PRA might not function correctly!).

5.1.11.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Number Range Intervals →
Interval Maintenance (General)

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 86
Configuration Guide

You can maintain it at the object level and at different logical table’s level:

Figure 5.68 Interval Maintenance

If you click Maintain Number Range Interval ( ):

Figure 5.69 Define Number Range Intervals

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 87
Configuration Guide

If you click Maintain Configuration at Logical Table Level ( ):

Figure 5.70 Number Range Interval Assignments to PRA Tables

5.2 Production Tax and Royalty Reporting

5.2.1 Use

In this activity you maintain Number Ranges for different Objects and Logical tables for the Change document.

5.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → General Configuration
→ Maintain Common Number Ranges

2. You can maintain it at Object level and at Different Logical table’s level.

Figure 5.71 Maintain Common Number Ranges

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 88
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.72 Maintaining Number Ranges

3. Save and Exit.

5.2.3 Tax

5.2.3.1 Texas

5.2.3.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you assign the Number Ranges for Out of Statute Write Off Number, Auto, Suspend Criteria
Number, Limitation Criteria Number, and Statute of Limitation Exception Number.

5.2.3.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas(PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Texas Number Ranges

2. For Out Of Statute Write Off Number you can assign and maintain the Number Range Interval and configure for
logical table name.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 89
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.73 Maintain Texas Number Ranges

3. By clicking on Number Range Interval, you can assign the Number Range Interval for the NR Object.

Figure 5.74 Maintaining Number Range Intervals

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 90
Configuration Guide

4. By clicking Maintain Configuration, you assign and maintain Number Range Intervals for the logical table name.

Figure 5.75 Viewing Number Range Interval Assignments

5. Repeat the same for Auto Suspend Criteria Number, Out of Statute Write Off Number, Statue of Limitation
Criteria Number, Statue of Limitation Exception Number.

5.2.3.2 Wyoming

5.2.3.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Wyoming Number Ranges.

Refer to Section 5.3.3.1.2 Texas Procedure for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 91
Configuration Guide

5.2.3.3 New Mexico

5.2.3.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain New Mexico Number Ranges.

Refer to section 5.3.3.2.1 Wyoming Procedure for steps.

5.2.3.4 Colorado Conservation

5.2.3.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Colorado Tax Number Ranges.

Refer to Section 5.3.3.1.2 Texas Procedure for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 92
Configuration Guide

5.2.3.5 Colorado Severance

5.2.3.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas(PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Severance → Maintain Colorado Tax Number Ranges.

Refer to Section 5.3.3.1.2 Texas Procedure for steps.

5.2.3.6 Louisiana

5.2.3.6.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Louisiana Tax Number Ranges.

Refer to Section 5.3.3.1.2 Texas Procedure for steps.

5.2.3.7 Kansas

5.2.3.7.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Maintain Kansas Number Ranges.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 93
Configuration Guide

Refer to Section 5.3.3.1.2 Texas Procedure for steps.

5.2.3.8 North Dakota

5.2.3.8.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Enable Report.

Refer to Section 5.3.3.1.2 Texas Procedure for steps.

5.3 Units of Measurement (UoM)

5.3.1 Check Units of Measurement

5.3.1.1 Use

In most of the applications you often have to make calculations with quantities and physical units. Units of
Measurement are needed for their screen display and for internal conversions such as kilogram <-> gram, centimeter
<-> inch, etc. The international system of units (SI) is used for this.

The international system of units is based on seven basic Units of Measurement. All other units are derived from
these basic units. Units of Measurement that measure the same quantity (and can therefore be converted into each
other) are included in a Dimension.

Units of Measurement are held centrally in the SAP System for all applications. The conversion factors are stored in
the system with a unique internal key. The external display specifications are maintained for each Unit of
Measurement language-dependently. A Business Key (3 characters) and a Technical Key (6 characters) should be
maintained for each language.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 94
Configuration Guide

5.3.1.1.1 Standard settings

In the standard delivery system, Units of Measurement are defined according to the international System of Units
(SI). For a new installation, Units of Measurement are delivered in all clients. For upgrades, new Units of
Measurement are delivered only in Client 000. They then still have to be transported to the production clients.

5.3.1.1.2 Recommendation

If you intend to perform cross-company data exchange, note that the Units of Measurement with company-specific
characteristics may have an adverse effect.

5.3.1.1.3 Activities

• Check that the dimensions delivered and the associated Units of Measurements are complete.
• If you are using EDI, you should also check the ISO codes.

• Dimensions
1. Call the Maintenance transaction by double-clicking on Execute.

2. On the initial screen of the Maintenance transaction, call the function Dimensions. To get a definition of a
Dimension, place the cursor on the Dimension and choose the function Details.

3. If required, create new Dimensions with the function New Entries.

• Units of Measurement
1. Call the maintenance transaction by double-clicking on Execute, or press F3 to leave the Dimension
maintenance and return to the initial screen of the Maintenance transaction.

2. Select, from F4 Help for the field next to the Units of Measurement function, the individual Dimensions,
and choose the Units of Measurement function.

3. To get a definition of a Unit of Measurement, position the cursor on the Unit of Measurement and choose
the function Details.

4. If required, define new Units of Measurement according to the International System of Units (SI) with the
menu function Unit of Meaurement → Create.

5. Here you have to make specifications for:

o Display (including a descriptive Units of Measurement text)

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 95
Configuration Guide

o Conversion (not applicable to Units of Measurement without Dimensions)

o Data exchange (EDI) (optional)
o Application parameters

5.3.1.1.4 ISO codes

1. Call the Maintenance transaction by double-clicking on Execute, or press F3 to leave Maintenance of Units of
Measurement or Dimensions and return to the initial screen of the transaction.

2. Choose the function ISO codes.

3. If required, maintain new ISO codes with the function New Entries.

4. Every time a new client is added to the system, you must create a new Number Range Intervals for that client.

5.3.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings→ Units of Measure→Check
Units of Measurement

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 96
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.76 UoM Initial Screen

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 97
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.77 UoM Dimension Volume Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 98
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.78 ISO Units Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 99
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.79 Dimensions for UoM Overview

5.3.2 Define Unit of Measurement Groups

5.3.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up a Unit of Measure Group. A Unit of Measure Group defines a set of standardized
measurement units for use in a particular environment.

In order to make the integration between the PRA Solution and the Measurement System flexible, the Measurement
System can be configured to display readings with Units of Measurement in a specific Unit of Measure Group. This
allows the system to be configured for multiple situations. This is possible as long as the Unit of Measure Group is

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 100
Configuration Guide

defined in the Measurement System and is tied to a Reading Type. (Each Reading Type is defined with a Unit of
Measure Group and possibly a Unit of Measure.)

Once the Unit of Measure Groups are configured in the Measurement System and tied to Reading Types, the output
will display Units of Measure in the defined Unit of Measure Group for the particular reading. In addition, Unit of
Measure groups are assigned to delivery networks, and they control the target units for the Quantity Conversion
Interface (QCI) calculations in the PRA system. An entry is needed for the Unit of Measure Group that QCI will use.
Once you enter a Unit of Measure Group, you must tie the specific Units of Measure that will be standardized to that
group.

Example
• UoM group UG1 (US Gas at 15.025 psi, 60°F) contains the following standardized measurement units:
• BC1 BTU/cubic foot at 15.025/60/SD
• MBD one million BTU (60 FAH, SD)
• MC1 one thousand cubic feet

Requirements
A Unit of Measure Group is attached to all well completions and measurement points being used in order for the
Measurement System to determine which Units of Measure to display for the readings.

Standard settings
The standard system is provided with the following configured Unit of Measure groups:
• EU1 European Standards Unit of Measure
• GS1 Natural Gas Selection
• GS2 Masses and Energies
• GS3 Volumes and Energies
• GSE Energies only
• GSM Masses only
• GSV Volumes only
• ISO ISO units for Natural Gas
• NA1 North American Measurements
• UG1 US Gas at 15.025 psi, 60°F
• UG2 US Gas at 14,73 psi, 60°F
• UG3 US Gas at 14,65 psi, 60°F
• USG NA Liquid Gallons
• USL NA Liquid Barrels

Recommendation
The standard setup should be sufficient for most applications.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 101
Configuration Guide

Activities
1. Choose Units of measure group.

2. Choose New Entries, then add the new Unit of Measure Group code and its description.

3. Choose Assignment to Unit of Measure.

4. Assign the required Units of Measure.

5. Save the Unit of Measure group.

6. Go to the Reading Types configuration and add the Unit of Measure Group. Then, if necessary, add the
appropriate Unit of Measure to each Reading Type.

5.3.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Units of Measure → Define
Unit of Measurement Groups

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 102
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.80 UoM Overview

5.3.3 Define Rounding

5.3.3.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to set rounding for the enhanced Contractual Allocation (CA) level and owner level
for a specific Unit of Measure.

5.3.3.1.1 Requirements

The unit of measure must exist in the following Customization:

Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Units of Measure → Check Units of Measurement

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 103
Configuration Guide

5.3.3.1.2 Activities

The Factor Rounding Level must be lesser than the CA rounding level and CA rounding level should be less than the
Owner Rounding Level.
Example
• If the Owner Rounding Level is set to 3, then CA Rounding Level can be anything equal to or less than 3 (like 2).
• If the CA Rounding Level is set to 3, then the Factor Rounding Level can be set to anything equal to or less than
3 (like 1 or 0).

5.3.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Units of Measure → Define
Rounding

Figure 5.81 Display Maintain Rounding Value for PRA UoM

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 104
Configuration Guide

5.4 Measurement System

5.4.1 Quantity Conversion Interface (QCI) Configuration

5.4.1.1 Use

This section contains information about Customizing the Measurement System. The Measurement System in PRA is
used to obtain standardized readings from observed readings, in order to be able to standardized volumes.

5.4.2 Define Calculations

5.4.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Calculations.

Calculations are defined for the Measurement System and are generally used to convert Measurement readings into
standardized units. Each calculation is implemented by a function which is defined to the Measurement System here.
The function must have a standard interface consisting of an input table of parameters and readings, and an output
table of standardized readings. When the Calculation function is defined to the Measurement System, parameters
may be defined which will be passed from the Measurement System to the function, and which may be used within
the Calculation function itself.

Please use the F1 help for additional information.

5.4.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Measurement System
Configuration → Calculation → Define Calculations

Use the reference below and the F1 help to maintain the required entries in the table.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 105
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.82 Calculation Functions Overview

Figure 5.83 Calculation Parameters Overview

5.4.3 Assign Calculations to Measurement Types

5.4.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you assign Calculations to Measurement Types.

The Measurement Type is very important to the Measurement System. It defines a consistent set of readings to be
taken for a business object, such as a Delivery Network Measurement Point. Calculations are assigned to
Measurement Types to allow readings within a Measurement Type to be calculated automatically. The readings that

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 106
Configuration Guide

are calculated are usually the standardized readings required by PRA and they are usually calculated using SAP-
supplied Calculation functions such as the QCI conversion.

Each Calculation is defined as a function with a standard interface that defines a set of input (observed) parameters
and a set of output (derived) parameters. When a Calculation is assigned to a Measurement Type, the readings
within the Measurement type are assigned to the observed and/or derived parameters of the function interface.

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

5.4.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Measurement System
Configuration → Calculation → Assign Calculations to Measurement Types

Use the reference below and the F1 help to maintain the required entries in the table.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 107
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.84 Measurement Type Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 108
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.85 Calculation Overview

5.4.4 Define Reading Types

5.4.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Reading Types.

In order for the Measurement System to display and store data, Reading Types must exist. Each Reading in a
Measurement Type uses a Reading Type to define its characteristics. A Reading Type stores the following
information:
• Format (number, character, date, time)
• Dimension (pressure, temperature, density, time)
• Unit of measure group
• Unit of measure
• Output format
• Possible values
• Search helps

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 109
Configuration Guide

Each Reading Type must have at least one Unit of Measure Group in order to establish the Reading Type
characteristics. An entry should exist in the Reading Types for each customized UoM Group. If a Reading Type
characteristics will not change from one UoM Group to another, you may create Reading Types with a blank UoM
Group and the setup will work across all UoM Groups. If a populated UoM Group is added to a Reading Type that
contains a blank UoM Group, the blank UoM Group characteristics will become invalid.

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

5.4.4.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Measurement System
Configuration → Define Reading types

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 110
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.86 Reading Type Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 111
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.87 Reading Type Characteristics Details

5.4.5 Define Measurement Types

5.4.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Measurement Types.

In order for the Measurement System to display Readings, Readings must first be entered in a Measurement Type.
The Measurement Type stores the Readings and their specific characteristics. Characteristics include:
• Reading Type
• Reading Group
• Status
• Position
• Derived or Observed Conditions, and
• Display Control.

The Measurement Type is defined and then the Readings within the Measurement type are defined. Each Reading is
assigned to a Reading Type which defines the formatting and validation rules for the Measurement Reading.
Sometimes Reading Groups are defined within the Measurement Type and Readings assigned to the Group. This
results in the Readings being displayed under different tabs when entering Measurements of this Type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 112
Configuration Guide

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

5.4.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Measurement System
Configuration → Define Measurement Types

Figure 5.88 Measurement Type Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 113
Configuration Guide

Measurement Type Reading Groups

Figure 5.89 Reading Groups Overview

Measurement Type Readings

Figure 5.90 Readings Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 114
Configuration Guide

5.4.6 Define Measurement Classes

5.4.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Measurement Classes.

Measurement classes define the types of business objects for which Measurements are recorded, such as Well
Completion or Measurement Point business objects. Each class corresponds to a single application, and each class
can be assigned to multiple Measurement Types. This defines the Types of Measurements that may be recorded
against business objects in this class.

In order for the Measurement System to group Measurement Types by applications, a Measurement Class needs to
be created for each application which uses the Measurement System. Sometimes an application that uses the
Measurement System records some Measurement Readings in its own database (for example, standardized
Measurement Point Volumes are recorded in the Measurement Point Volumes database as well as the Measurement
System Database). In this case, field transport rules may be defined for each Measurement Type assigned to a class.
These rules control which readings are copied from the Measurement recorded by the Measurement System to the
record in the application database.

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

5.4.6.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Measurement System
Configuration → Define Measurement Classes

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 115
Configuration Guide

Measurement Class

Figure 5.91 Measurement Class Overview

Measurement type assignment

Figure 5.92 Measurement Type Assignment Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 116
Configuration Guide

5.4.7 Define Measurement Sources

5.4.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Measurement Sources. Measurement Sources define the applications that record
Measurements using the Measurement System.

Each application must be assigned to a Measurement Source. An existing source may be used if there is a logical
hierarchy (for example, all Measurement Point applications can use the same source), or if a new one can be
created.

Please refer to the F1 help for the node for additional details.

5.4.7.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings→ Measurement System
Configuration → Define Measurement Sources

Figure 5.93 Measurement Source Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 117
Configuration Guide

5.4.8 Define Measurement Reading Derivation

5.4.8.1 Use

Define Measurement Reading Derivation.

5.4.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Measurement System
Configuration → Define Measurement Reading Derivation

2. Enter the Measurement type and proceed to maintain the Derivation as per your needs.

Figure 5.94 Measurement Reading Derivation Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 118
Configuration Guide

5.5 Org Levels/Geo Locations

5.5.1 Cross Reference between Country and Primary

Geographic Location

5.5.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up a Cross Reference between a Country and a Primary Geographic Location.

The Cross Reference between Country and Primary Geographic Location is a list of Primary Geographic Locations
and their corresponding countries that can be used in the PRA system. This Cross Reference table is used in all PRA
transactions to validate the user-entered primary geographical location for the Country. The Countries to be set up in
this Cross Reference must already be defined in SAP.

The standard Cross Reference between Country and Primary Geographical Location is delivered as part of a
standard PRA implementation. New relationships can be added. For the US and Canada, the Primary Geographical
Locations must be the API (American Petroleum Institute) equivalent for the state.

5.5.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Cross Reference between
Country and Primary Geo. Location

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 119
Configuration Guide

To set up a Cross Reference in the system:

1. Choose New Entries and enter a valid SAP country (a country that is valid in the SAP system).

Figure 5.95 Country and Primary Geo. Location Xref

2. In the Pri. Loc. column, enter the API state equivalents for the corresponding country. There is no validation for
the data entered here.

Figure 5.96 Overview of Added Entries

3. In the last Pri. Loc. column, enter a valid description for the API state.

4. Save the Cross Reference.

5.5.2 Cross Reference between Country, Primary, and

Secondary Geographic Location

5.5.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up a Cross Reference between Country, Primary, and Secondary Geographic Locations.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 120
Configuration Guide

The Cross Reference between Country, Primary, and Secondary Geographic Locations and their corresponding
Countries can be used in the PRA system. This Cross Reference table is used in all PRA transactions to validate the
user-entered Primary and Secondary Geographical Location values for the Country.
• The Primary Geographic Location is a Region or a State.
• The Secondary Geographic Location is a Country.
• The Countries to be set up in this Cross Reference must already be defined in SAP.
• The Primary Geographical Locations to be set up in this Cross Reference must already be defined in the Cross
Reference between Country and Primary Geographical Location.

The standard Cross Reference between Countries, Primary and Secondary Geographical Location is delivered as
part of a standard PRA implementation. New relationships can be added. For the US and Canada, the Primary and
Secondary Geographical Locations must be the API (American Petroleum Institute) equivalent for the State and
Country, respectively.

5.5.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Cross Reference between
Country, Primary and Sec. Geo. Location

2. Choose New Entries and enter a valid SAP country

Figure 5.97 Cross Reference between Country and Secondary Geo. Locations

3. Enter all valid Primary Geographical Locations for the Country.

4. In the Sec. Loc. column, enter all API Country equivalents for the Country and State Cross Reference. There is
no validation for the data entered here.

5. In the second Sec. Loc. column, enter a valid description for the API County.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 121
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.98 Overview of Added Entries

6. Save the Cross Reference.

5.5.3 Maintain Primary Geographic Location Pressure

Base

5.5.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the Pressure Base - the basis to be used for Pressure calculations - by Primary
Geographic Location (State).

In this activity, each PGL (State) is given a Pressure Base. The system uses the Pressure Base defined for the
specific State, when delivery network processing is carried out. The system crosschecks the Pressure Base
associated with the measurement group against the pressure base entered for the relevant Primary Geographic
Location, in this Customizing table.

During Delivery Network setup, you enter a Primary Geographic Location in the system. Each network has a
measurement group. The system checks the Pressure Base against the (configured) State Pressure Base. If the
Pressure Base and the State Pressure Base are the same, no message is displayed. If the Pressure Base and the
State Pressure Base are different, it means that you have entered a measurement group that is inconsistent with the
State.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 122
Configuration Guide

5.5.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Maintain Primary Geographic
Location Pressure Base

Figure 5.99 Overview of Location to Pressure Base Xref

2. Choose New Entries and enter a valid SAP country

Figure 5.100 Overview of Added Entries

3. Save the new entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 123
Configuration Guide

5.6 Application Toolbar Navigation

5.6.1 Application Maintenance

5.6.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure transactions/application and there inform action like screen program, dynpro
number, action, input screen parameters and output data element parameters.

Note: Input screen parameters and output data element parameters positions are important, as they are used for
mapping output data element of transactions to navigation transaction input screen parameters.
Steps to find transaction information.
1 Execute the transaction, initial screens opens
2 Press F1 on the input element, help documentation opens, click on Technical Information button.
3 Technical information pop-up open, you will find the program name, Screen Number, Screen Field, action
(will be part of status)
4 Action information can be found by double clicking on the status field

5.6.1.2 Procedure

1 Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Application Toolbar Navigation
→ Application Maintenance

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 124
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.101 Overview of Application Maintenance

2 Choose New Entries and enter the transaction information

Figure 5.102 Overview of Added Entries

3 Save the new entries.

5.6.2 Mapping Definition

5.6.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the transaction and navigation transaction along with output data element of
transaction to the input screen element of navigation transactions.

Note: Here output data element positions are mapped to Input screen elements positions

5.6.2.2 Procedure

1 Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 125
Configuration Guide

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Application Toolbar Navigation
→ Mapping Definition

Figure 5.103 Overview of Mapping Definition

2 Choose New Entries and enter Mapping information

Figure 5.104 Overview of Added Entries

3 Save the new entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 126
Configuration Guide

5.6.3 User-Specific Assignment

5.6.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the navigation transaction order display for each users.

5.6.3.2 Procedure

1 Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Global Settings → Application Toolbar Navigation
→ User-Specific Assignment

Figure 5.105 Overview of User-Specific Assignment

4. 2 Choose New Entries and enter user-specific assignment information

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 127
Configuration Guide

Figure 5.106 Overview of Added Entries

3 Save the new entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 128
Configuration Guide

6 Production

6.1 Maintain Number Range Groups

Please refer to the configuration guide for Number Ranges.

6.2 Maintain Number Range Interval

Please refer to the configuration guide for Number Ranges.

6.3 Silo/Tank Management

6.3.1 Define Storage Object Class

6.3.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define storage object classes. By means of the storage object class, you determine how the
storage object/tank characteristic data is managed in the system.

The tank characteristics depend on the basic usage indicator and the linear-to-volume conversion flag:
• To be able to use functions like tank strapping history as well as special corrections (for example, floating roof
correction), select the basic usage indicator Storage object for silo management (temp. fl. roof correction).
• For simple tanks where no special linear-to-volume calculations are required (for example, service station
tanks), select the basic usage indicator Storage object for bulk materials.
• To activate strapping data maintenance and tank strapping, set the L/V flag.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 129
Configuration Guide

6.3.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Silo/Tank Management → Define
Storage Object Class

2. Choose New Entries and enter a new SOC Class Name to be maintained. Enter other Parameter like Usage
indicator and L/V Flag:

Figure 6.1 Adding New Entries

3. Save the Storage Object Class.

6.3.2 Define Additional Settings for Storage Object

Class

6.3.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the following settings for enhanced linear-to-volume functions of the storage
object classes, which are defined with the basic usage indicator Storage object for Silo Management:
• Create a relation between the unpumpable quantity of a tank and the volume of the strapping table at the
minimum dip height.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 130
Configuration Guide

• Create a relation between the capacity of a tank and the volume of the strapping table at the maximum dip
height.
• Determine whether volume entries or specific volume entries are the basis for automatically filling tank-strapping
tables.
• Determine whether volume entries or specific volume entries are the basis for tank dip calculations.

6.3.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Silo/Tank Management → Define
Additional Settings for Storage Object Class

2. In change view, for a SOC Class enter other Parameters, which are maintained as additional settings:

Figure 6.2 Storage Obj. Class - Additional Silo Tank Properties

3. Save the Storage Object Class.

6.3.3 Define Storage Object Types

6.3.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define storage object types, which can also be used as reference storage objects.

The data describing the storage object type is stored in a storage object characteristic segment.

The storage object type has to be assigned to an existing storage object class.

The storage object class can be defined in Customizing for the Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) by
choosing HPM → Silo/Tank Management → Define storage object class.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 131
Configuration Guide

Segment data for the storage object type can be maintained in Customizing for the Industry Solution Oil & Gas
(Downstream) by choosing HPM → Silo/Tank Management → Maintain segment data for storage object type.

6.3.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Silo/Tank Management → Define
Storage Object Types

2. Choose New Entries and enter a new SO Type to be maintained for a defined Storage Object Class:

Figure 6.3 Storage Object Type Overview

3. Save the new Storage Object Type entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 132
Configuration Guide

6.4 Statistical Key Configuration

6.4.1 Well Count SKF Downtime Minor Workover –

TBLGR030

6.4.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you add, update, and maintain downtime reason codes, which are "minor workovers". This is
used in the SKF well count. If the configuration edit is turned on, allowing the report to count minor days, then the
system will access this table to get the minor workover codes.

6.4.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Statistical Key Configuration → Well
Count SKF Downtime Minor Workover

Figure 6.4 Well Count SKF Downtime Minor Workover

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 133
Configuration Guide

2. Choose New Entries, enter valid WC Downtime Reason Code, and save the entry:

Figure 6.5 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

6.4.2 PRA to CO SKF Cross Reference – OIUPR_SKFX

6.4.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the PRA - CO (Core) SKF cross reference.
• A statistical key figure is first configured in CO (Controlling) for a specific controlling area and called the
SAP_STAT_CD in Table OIUPR_SKFX.
• A statistical key figure is also configured in PRA and called the STAT_TYPE_CD in Table OIUPR_SKFX.

Those two statistical key figures create the cross reference between CO and PRA.

6.4.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Statistical Key Configuration → PRA
to CO SKF Cross Reference – OIUPR_SKFX

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 134
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.6 SKF Type to CO SKF Configuration Xref

4. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Stat kyfig, StatKeyFig.

Figure 6.7 Adding New Entries

5. Save the entry.

6.4.3 Well Count SKF Downtime Reg Reasons –

TBLGR029

6.4.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can configure all of the well completion downtime reason codes that are regulatory-reason
related. Standard downtime reason codes are provided, but you can create your own, if you need to (to create your
own, select New Entries).

If the configuration edit is turned on, allowing the report to count well completions which are down for regulatory
reasons, then the system will access this table to get the regulatory reason downtime codes.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 135
Configuration Guide

6.4.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Statistical Key Configuration → Well
Count SKF Downtime Reg Reasons – TBLGR029

6.4.4 Well Count SKF Plug, Sold, Abandoned ST –

TBLGR025

6.4.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define SKF well completion plug, sold, and abandoned statuses.

The SKF (Statistical Key Figure) report excludes all well completions that have a status of plugged, sold, or
abandoned (in other words, the well completion is down - not producing for a specific reason). This activity allows you
to define which well completion statuses are plugged, sold, or abandoned.

6.4.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity usingthe following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Statistical Key Configuration → Well
Count SKF Plug, Sold, Abandoned ST – TBLGR025

Figure 6.8 Well Count SKF Plug, Sold, Abandoned ST

2. Choose New Entries, enter valid Status, Created.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 136
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.9 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

6.4.5 Drilling Days SKF Major Workover Downtime

Reasons

6.4.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define reason codes as Workover Reason Codes. The report determines downtimes/major
Workover days for well completions. This activity is used to define reason codes as Workover Reason Codes, so that
they will be included in the report.

6.4.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Statistical Key Configuration →
Drilling Days SKF Major Workover Downtime Reasons

Figure 6.10 Drilling Days SKF Major Workover Downtime Reason

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Workover Downtime Reason.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 137
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.11 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

6.4.6 Drilling Days Drilling Status Codes

6.4.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure well completion status codes for drilling. Use this part of the SKF Report (drilling
days) to define the valid Drilling Codes. Use it to create a new entry, which will also be defined as a valid drilling
status for well completions for the report.

6.4.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Statistical Key Configuration →
Drilling Days Drilling Status Codes

Figure 6.12 Drilling Days SKF Major Workover Status

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Workover Downtime Reason.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 138
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.13 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

6.4.7 Define Cycle Segment Configuration

6.4.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure Cycle Segment Configuration. The Cycle Segment Configuration (OIUCM_CSC)
configures well information, including the stat key number of months, for drilling calculations and lengths of inactive
and working periods.

6.4.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Statistical Key Configuration →
DEFINE Cycle Segment Configuration

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Workover Downtime Reason.

Figure 6.14 Cycle Segment Configuration Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 139
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.15 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.5 Measurement Type Configuration

6.5.1 Chemical Analysis Measurement Type

Configuration

6.5.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the measurement types (which are defined in the Measurement System) to be used
in the Chemical Analysis transaction [O3U_CHA1]. For each chemical analysis type, basis, system/manually
calculated, and typification level, the measurement types for the chemical analysis header, gas/liquid properties, and
gas/liquid components can be configured.

6.5.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Type Configuration →
Chemical Analysis Measurement Type Configuration

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 140
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.16 Chemical Analysis Measurement Type Determination

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Measurement Type, Basis combination

Figure 6.17 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

6.5.2 Measurement Point Volumes Measurement Type

Configuration

6.5.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Measurement Types (defined in the Measurement System) to be used in the
Measurement Point Volumes transaction. For each processing product (major + minor product), Measurement Point
Volume Category, Volume Category, and Chart Type, the Measurement Types can be configured.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 141
Configuration Guide

6.5.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Type Configuration →
Measurement Point Volumes Measurement Type Configuration

Figure 6.18 Measurement Point Meas. Type Derivation

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Major Product, Product, Measurement Point Category, Volume Category,
Chart Type Code, Measurement Type combination.

Figure 6.19 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 142
Configuration Guide

6.5.3 Well Test Measurement type Configuration

6.5.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Measurement Types (defined in the PRA Measurement System) to be used in
the Well Test transaction.

You can configure the producing method for each Well Test Type, well class, and producing method.

6.5.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Type Configuration →
Well Test Measurement Type Configuration

Figure 6.20 Well Type Measurement Type Derivation

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Test Type, Well Class, Producing Method Code and Measurement Type
combination.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 143
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.21 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

6.5.4 Well Completion Volumes Measurement Type

Configuration

6.5.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Measurement Types (defined in the Measurement System) to be used in the
Well Completion Volumes transaction.

You can configure the Measurement Types for each processing product (major + minor product).

6.5.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Type Configuration →
Well Completion Volumes Measurement Type Configuration

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 144
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.22 Well Completion Volumes Measurement Type Determination

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Test Type, Well Class, Producing Method Code and Measurement Type
combination

Figure 6.23 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

6.5.5 MP Volumes Tank Strapping Usage Configuration

6.5.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the MP Volume Tank Strapping Usage.

This table is used by the Tank Strapping transaction - which is used to measure volume in a tank - to determine what
measurement types and readings are using Tank Strappings. Each measurement type and reading that uses the
Tank Strapping transaction should be in this table.

The Tank Strapping transaction then reads the table and uses the configuration to determine if existing strappings
can be changed or deleted by you (the user).

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 145
Configuration Guide

If measurement point volumes have used a specific strapping record, the Tank Strapping transaction does not allow it
to be deleted.

6.5.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Type Configuration →
MP Volumes Tank Strapping Usage Configuration

Figure 6.24 Tank Usage Overview

2. Choose New Entries, and enter valid Measurement Type, Reading Identified combination.

Figure 6.25 Adding New Entries

3. Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 146
Configuration Guide

6.5.6 Measurement Point Volume Measurement Type

Assignment to Measurement Reading

6.5.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you assign a Measurement Point Volume Measurement Type to a measurement reading, for use
in the Measurement System.

Example
When you access this activity, the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box is displayed.

1. In the Measurement Type field, enter the relevant measurement type. For example, you could enter a
measurement type of <MP Generics (MP_GEN_TEST)>

2. Select Continue.

3. On the IMG table, select New Entries.

4. In the Reading field, enter the measurement reading (example: MPNO). You make an entry in the Qty. fld field,
and in the Unit fld field. The Unit field is the unit of measure reading.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 147
Configuration Guide

6.5.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Type Configuration →
Measurement Point Volume Measurement Type Assignment to Measurement Reading

Figure 6.26 Meas. Point Volumes Assignment to Measurement Readings

2. For the selected Measurement Type, Measurement Reading Identifier for Quantity Field Name & Unit Field name
could be maintained:

Figure 6.27 Adding New Entries

3. After saving the entry, come out of the maintenance screen.

6.5.7 Measurement Point Measurement Type Derivation

6.5.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the measurement type for Measurement Points, which consists of defining a cross-
reference record of the product, MP category, volume category, MP chart type, and measurement type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 148
Configuration Guide

6.5.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Type Configuration →
Measurement Point Measurement Type Derivation

Figure 6.28 Measurement Point Meas. Type Derivation

Figure 6.29 Adding New Entries

2. Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 149
Configuration Guide

6.6 Well-Related Configuration

This section contains information about customizing for well configuration.

6.6.1 Define Platform Location

6.6.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the master list of Platform Locations to be used by the platform identification
transaction.

6.6.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Platform Locations

Figure 6.30 Platform Location

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Offshore Code and its Description.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 150
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.31 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.6.2 Define Platform Types

6.6.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the Platform Types. Platform Types are used to describe the structural make-up of the
platform.They are used in the Platform Identification transaction.

6.6.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Platform Types

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 151
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.32 Platform Type

2. Choose New Entries and maintain new Platform type and Descriptive Text.

Figure 6.33 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.6.3 Define Well Drilling Directions

6.6.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the Directions in which the well can be drilled. This is used in the Well ID transaction.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 152
Configuration Guide

6.6.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration →
Define Well Drilling Directions

Figure 6.34 Well Derivation

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Well Drill and Descriptive Text.

Figure 6.35 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.6.4 Define Well Completion Purposes

6.6.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the master list of Well Completion Purposes, which indicates the method of
operation at the well completion. This attribute is captured in the Well Completion Identification transaction.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 153
Configuration Guide

6.6.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Well Completion Purposes

Figure 6.36 Well Deviation

Figure 6.37 Well Purpose Codes Table

2. Choose New Entries and maintain new Purse and meaningful short description

Figure 6.38 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 154
Configuration Guide

6.6.5 Define Well Completion Programs

6.6.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you customize the master list of Well Completion Programs, which indicates the project and/or
phase for the well completion. This attribute is captured in the Well Completion Identification transaction

6.6.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Well Completion Programs

Figure 6.39 Well Comp Program ID and Name

2. Choose New Entries and maintain new Program and meaningful short description.

Figure 6.40 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 155
Configuration Guide

6.6.6 Define Well Completion Status Codes

6.6.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Well Completion Statuses, which identify the state of the well, such as
producing, abandoned, drilling, etc. The Well Completion Status is captured in the Well Completion Dated
transaction. The volume allocation process in the Production component interprets all statuses as producing unless
they are also defined with non-producing statuses.

6.6.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Well Completion Status Codes

Figure 6.41 Well Completion Status

2. Choose New Entries and maintain new Status Code and WBS Flag against this status.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 156
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.42 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.6.7 Define Well Class/Well Status Xref

6.6.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up cross references between Well Statuses and Well Classes.

6.6.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Well Class / Well Status Xref

Figure 6.43 Well Class/Well Status Xref

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Status against Well Class.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 157
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.44 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.6.8 Define Producing Methods

6.6.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you customize the well completion Producing Methods, which are the techniques used to
describe the method of extraction of the product from the reservoir or the specified well completion. Producing
Methods are captured in the Well Completion Dated Characteristics transaction.

6.6.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Producing Methods

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 158
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.45 Well Category/Producing Method Codes Table

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Producing Method and meaningful short text.

Figure 6.46 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.6.9 Define Non-Producing Status Codes

6.6.9.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the Non-Producing Well Codes. They represent all the well status codes that are Non-
Producing. This should account for all the Non-Producing well situations that you are going to use on your system.

In the Well Completion Dated Characteristics transaction, the well completion status defines whether the well
completion is to be considered a producing well completion, from the point of view of PRA volume allocation.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 159
Configuration Guide

6.6.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Non-Producing Status Codes

Figure 6.47 Non-Producing Well Status

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Status Code.

Figure 6.48 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.6.10 Define Crude Types

6.6.10.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the Crude Types.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 160
Configuration Guide

This classifies crude oil as either produced from a well completion, or measured at a measurement point. Crude
Types are captured in the Well Completion Dated Characteristics and Measurement Point Dated Characteristics
transactions.

6.6.10.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Crude Types

Figure 6.49 Crude Types

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Crude Type and meaningful description.

Figure 6.50 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 161
Configuration Guide

6.6.11 Define Downtime Reasons

6.6.11.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up all the Downtime Reasons that you would like to use on your system. The Downtime
Reasons specify the approved reasons that a well completion can be down (not producing). Downtime Reasons are
used when capturing downtime in the Well Completion Downtime transaction.

6.6.11.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Downtime Reasons

Figure 6.51 Well Comp Downtime Reason Codes

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Well Completion Downtime Reason and WBS Flag.

Figure 6.52 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 162
Configuration Guide

6.6.12 Define Lifestage Events

6.6.12.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Production Lifestage Events such as first injection, first production, and well sold.
These are, in a sense, the important events in the (production) life of a well.

6.6.12.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Well Related Configuration → Define
Lifestage Events

Figure 6.53 Life Stage Table

6.6.13 Maintain API Side Track Code at Well Completion

[NOTE: Available only in Roadmap Landscape]

6.6.13.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to configure Sidetrack Code, such that it can be maintained at the well completion
ID.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 163
Configuration Guide

Note:
If you have selected the checkbox, Maintain API Sidetrack Code at Well Completion, then API Sidetrack
Code field will be enabled at the well completion ID. If no data is maintained for the Sidetrack at the well
completion ID, then the reports will pick the Sidetrack information from the well ID.

6.7 Measurement Point Configuration

6.7.1 Define Chart Types

6.7.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the master list of Chart Types, which indicate the calculation method to be used in
computing measurement point volumes using static/differential or digital gas readings. Chart Types are associated
with measurement points on the Measurement Point Dated Characteristics transaction.

6.7.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Chart Types

Figure 6.54 Chart type Common Table

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Chart Type and meaningful short description.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 164
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.55 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.7.2 Define Meter Classes

6.7.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the master list of Meter Classes, which identify the operator of the measurement point.
They are captured in the Measurement Point Identification transaction.

6.7.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Meter Classes

Figure 6.56 Meter Class

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Meter Class and meaningful short description.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 165
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.57 Adding New Entries

3. After successfully saving the entry, come out from the maintenance screen.

6.7.3 Define Transportation Methods

6.7.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Transportation Methods. Transportation Methods are the methods by which a product
is transported from a measurement point or well completion. Transportation Methods are associated with
measurement points and well completions on the Measurement Point/Well Completion to Transporter Cross-
Reference transaction.

6.7.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Transportation Methods

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 166
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.58 Transportation Method

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Meter Class and meaningful short description.

Figure 6.59 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.7.4 Define Volume Sources

6.7.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Volume Sources.

A Volume Source is an information-only field used to identify the source of a volume at a measurement point or well
completion. Volume Source is used in the Measurement Point and Well Completion Volumes transactions.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 167
Configuration Guide

6.7.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Volume Sources

Figure 6.60 Volume Source

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Meter Class and meaningful short description.

Figure 6.61 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 168
Configuration Guide

6.8 Function/Allocation Configuration

6.8.1 Define Volume Allocation Metered Volume

Configuration

6.8.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Measurement Point - Volume Type combinations.

Configure the Measurement Point type and Volume Type combinations to be used by the Metered Volume
Theoretical Calculation Method, which is used by Volume Allocation and the Delivery Network/Well Completion
Theoretical Calculation Method transaction.

6.8.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Volume Allocation Method Volume Configuration

Figure 6.62 Volume Allocation Metered Volume Configuration

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Measurement Point Type and Volume Type combination.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 169
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.63 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.8.2 Define Production Configurable Functions

6.8.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Production Configurable Functions.

The Production Configurable Functions can be associated with some Production applications to provide flexibility for
specific areas of functionality. For example, a new well test prior period notification (PPN) function can be created to
trigger PPNs based on criteria that is different from what was delivered. If a different function is needed, it would be
associated with the application here.

6.8.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Production Configurable Functions

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 170
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.64 Production Configurable Functions

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Function against the Production Applications.

Figure 6.65 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.8.3 Define Plant Allocation Methods

6.8.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the Plant Allocation Methods.

The Plant Allocation Methods defined here are associated with a contract in the Plant Allocation Methods transaction
and subsequently used by the allocation process when allocating full plants.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 171
Configuration Guide

6.8.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Plant Allocation Methods

Figure 6.66 Gas Plant Allocation Methods

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Plant Allocation Method with meaningful short description.

Figure 6.67 Adding New Entries

3. After saving the entry successfully, come out form the maintenance screen.

6.8.4 Define Theoretical Calculation Methods

6.8.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Theoretical Calculation Methods.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 172
Configuration Guide

The Theoretical Calculation Methods defined here are associated to a well completion or Delivery Network on the
DN/WC Theoretical Calculation Methods transaction, and are used by volume allocation to determine how network or
well completion theoretical are processed. The Theoretical Calculation Methods that can be configured here are
those based on well tests.

6.8.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Theoretical Calculations Methods

Figure 6.68 Theoretical Calculation Methods Table

2. Choose New Entries and maintain new Theoretical Calculation Method with processing Function Module, if any.

Figure 6.69 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 173
Configuration Guide

6.8.5 Define Volume Type Gas Lift Gas Reclassification

6.8.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Volume Type Gas Lift Gas Reclassification.

After gas is injected into a well to enhance production and then allocated to a well completion, an exchange may be
necessary to specify the use of unallocated gas lift gas.

Use this table when the original use of the gas lift gas needs to be reclassified. The reclassification is specified using
codes that correspond with on- and off-lease reclassification volume types for receiving and supplying well
completions.

6.8.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Volume Type Gas Lift Gas Reclassification

Figure 6.70 Volume Type Gas Lift Gas Reclassification

2. Choose New Entries and maintain a new record:

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 174
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.71 Adding New Entries

3. In the Volume Type field, enter the Volume Type as required.

4. Complete the following fields as required:

• To enter an on-lease reclassification volume type for the receiving well completion, fill in the On prch field.
• To enter an on-lease reclassification volume type for the supplying well completion, fill in the On sold field.
• To enter the off-lease reclassification volume type for the receiving well completion, fill in the Of prch field.
• To enter the off-lease reclassification volume type for the supplying well completion, fill in the Of sold field.

5. Save your entry.

6.8.6 Define Volume Type Cross Reference to

Reproduced Gas

6.8.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Volume Type Cross Reference to Reproduced Gas.

Use this table to reclassify the Volume Type of Reproduced Gas that has been allocated to wells.

6.8.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point
Configuration → Define Volume Type Cross Reference to Reproduced Gas

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 175
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.72 Volume Type Xref to Reproduced Gas

2. Choose New Entries and enter respective Volume Type and the Gas Lift Usage Code.

Figure 6.73 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.8.7 Create Volume Allocation Server Group

6.8.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, define the relevant Volume Allocation Server group(s).

The standard PRA volume allocation process will create background jobs across all available background processes
within an SAP system using standard batch process load balancing.

However, if a large amount of allocation jobs are submitted at the same time, all available background process
queues on available servers will be filled, and other same-priority jobs will not be able to execute in a timely manner.
This may present a problem in some situations for specific customers. For that reason, SAP has made this option
available in customizing. You can choose to dedicate servers in server groups to be used only for volume allocation.

When you set this up here, the volume allocation process will target specific servers during job submission. The
concept of server groups is used to do that. A server group can be created to only include a set number of defined
servers. During the volume allocation job submission, all background jobs will be submitted to each of the defined
servers in the server group in a round robin manner. This will allow various application servers to NOT be included in
the server group, thus leaving them available for other processes within the SAP system.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 176
Configuration Guide

Note:
The SAP concept of server groups is used in a load balancing context. RFC server groups are used in
asynchronous remote function calls, which utilize dialog processes. However, volume allocation executes
purely in the background, utilizing batch processes. NONE of the load balancing configuration attached to
the Volume Allocation server group which the customer can create is considered because of this.

Activities
Within this IMG activity:
1. On the CCMS: RFC Server Group Maintenance screen, the Log-on group is the server group, the Instance is the
specific server, and the Status represents the status of the assignment (the status traffic light icon should be
green). Choose Create Assignment (or from the menu, choose Edit → Create Assignment).

The Create Assignment dialog box is displayed.

2. In the Group allocation screen area of that dialog box, in the Server group field, enter the relevant server group.
In the Instance field, enter the instance (the server that you would like to include in the server group).

In the screen area below, in the Determination of resources screen area, make entries in the following fields:
o Activated (0 or 1) - 0 means that resource determination is deactivated. 1 means that it is activated. The
default is '1'.
o Max. Requests in queue - number of maximum requests in the dialog queue.
o Max. no. of logons - number of log-ons in the system.
o Max. no of WPs used (work processes) - the total number of dialog work processes that can be used.
o Min. no. of free WPs - number of dialog work processes that should remain free for other users.
o Max. no. commentaries - the number of communication entries in the system.
o Max. Wait time - the quota for wait time.

3. When you have made your entries, select Copy.

6.8.7.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Define Volume Allocation Server Group

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 177
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.74 RFC Server Group Maintenance

Figure 6.75 Determination of Resources

6.8.8 Assign Server Group to Volume Allocation

6.8.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can dedicate a Server Group to be used in your system, which will then be used solely for
background allocation processing. You can have the server process volume background allocation (VA) in

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 178
Configuration Guide

Production, and you can select individual servers to be used in that Server Group. Note that this activity is optional.
You can choose to do it, in order to make volume allocation performance better.

By dedicating a Server Group to allocation background processing, you can avoid a situation in which allocation
processing using a Delivery Network group could cause batch processes within an SAP system to have too many
allocation jobs, thus not allowing other jobs to be run in an efficient manner. The solution is to allow VA / CA
allocations to target a selected group of servers, instead of all available servers within an SAP system.

The Volume Allocation process will read the assignment that you set up here during job submission, in order to
determine which servers will be used.

You can put Volume Allocation on one dedicated Server Group, or you can put VA on a Server Group, together with
CA (Contractual Allocation) background processing.

Activities

Within the IMG activity (on the Change View Server Group Assignment: Overview screen), select New Entries. In the
Process column, select <01 - Volume Allocation>. Next, within the Logon/Server Group column, select the server
group that you would like to use. Save your entry.

6.8.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Measurement Point Configuration →
Assign Server Group to Volume Allocation

Figure 6.76 Server Group Assignment

2. Choose New Entries and maintain Process against Server Group.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 179
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.77 Adding New Entries

3. Save your entry.

6.9 Maintain Primary Geographic Location Pressure

Base

Please refer to the configuration guide for Org Level Geo Locations.

6.10 Override Parameter ID [Optional]

6.10.1.1 Use

A standard SAP transaction screen's field defaults to a specific Parameter ID; however, the customer may not want
this. You can build your transaction with the Override Parameter ID functionality. Not all transactions have override
Parameter ID functionality.

6.10.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO [IMG Menu Path]

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production → Override Parameter IDs

2. Configure transaction, which are to override specific parameter IDs being populated.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 180
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.78 Override PID Configuration

3. Choose New Entries and enter a valid Transaction Code and related Parameter ID:

Figure 6.79 Adding New Entries

4. Save your entry.

6.11 Production Master Data

In order to run SAP PRA, the following two types of master data set-up are required:
• General Master Data set-up
• Master Data Entity set up

General Master Data:

General Master Data set-up is necessary, so that materials you want to use will be able to be used in subsequent
PRA processes. For example, PRA-Revenue and Statistical Key Figures (SKF) in SAP-Controlling

PRA uses many Master Data entities such as materials, wells and product codes. Some of the master data entities
need to be linked (cross-referenced) to SAP Core objects or other PRA entities, for use in specific PRA and Core
processes.

Refer to the SAP help portal link for further details:

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 181
Configuration Guide

http://help.sap.com/saphelp_rc10/helpdata/en/52/643843f5243246ba474ada8b30bb3b/content.htm?frameset=/en/d5/
8bdb38872d7a6ee10000000a11405a/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/f1/9d2c3adcc8431be10000000a114084/plain.ht
m&node_id=66&show_children=false

In the General Master Data process, you create those required links (cross-references).

The General Master Data setup process involves the following three transactions:
• Setting up a Product Setting up a Product Code Reference for Materials
• Reclassification of Materials to Product Codes
• SKF Cross-Referencing

6.11.1 Setting up a Product Code Reference for

Materials

6.11.1.1 Use

This allows your PRA materials that you are using to be cross-referenced to Core materials, which is necessary to
use the materials in certain PRA processes which are downstream from (subsequent to) Production (see Creating
Material to Product Code Cross-References).

6.11.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the node using following navigation options:

Transaction Code SAP Easy Access Menu Path

SAP Menu Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production → General Master Data
Maintenance → Material and Product Code Proc Xref
OR
[Transaction Code: O3UCM_TAB_MAINT_004]

2. To display existing Cross Reference, enter the Material Code on the screen and press Display Entry ( ).

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 182
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.80 Displaying Existing Cross Reference

3. To make any change, press Change Entry ( ).

Figure 6.81 Changing Entry

4. To create a new entry, enter the Material Code and press Create Entry ( ).

Figure 6.82 Creating Entry

5. Enter the Major Product and Product Code.

Figure 6.83 Entering Major Product

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 183
Configuration Guide

6. Press Save:

Figure 6.84 Record Created

6.11.2 Reclassification of Materials to Product Codes.

6.11.2.1 Use

Reclassification of materials allows PRA-Revenue to identify materials, in specific Revenue processes (see
Reclassifying Materials with Product Codes).

6.11.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the node using following navigation options:

Transaction Code SAP Easy Access Menu Path

SAP Menu Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production → General Master Data
Maintenance → Reclassification of Production Codes
OR
[Transaction Code: O3UCM_TAB_MAINT_003]

2. To display existing Reclassification, enter the Material Code on the screen and press Display Entry ( ).

Figure 6.85 Displaying Existing Reclassification

3. To make any Change, press Change Entry ( ).

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 184
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.86 Changing Entries

4. To create a new entry, enter the Material Code, Reclassification Major Product Code and Reclassification PD
and press Create Entry ( ).

Figure 6.87 Creating Entries

5. Enter the Reclassification Material Code.

Figure 6.88 Entering Reclassification Material Code

6. Save your entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 185
Configuration Guide

6.11.3 SKF Cross-Referencing

6.11.3.1 Use

SKF Cross-Referencing allows you to cross-reference PRA materials to statistical key figures (SKF) for reporting to
the SAP CO (Controlling) module (see Creating an SKF Cross-Reference).

6.11.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the node using following navigation options:

Transaction Code SAP Easy Access Menu Path

SAP Menu Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production → General Master Data
Maintenance → Volumetric SKF
OR
[Transaction Code: O3UCM_TAB_MAINT_010]

2. To display existing combination of SKF Type Code, Material Code and Volume Type on the screen and press
Display Entry ( ).

Figure 6.89 Displaying SKF Code

3. To make any change, press Change Entry ( ).

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 186
Configuration Guide

Figure 6.90 Changing Entries

4. To create a new entry, enter the SKF Type Code, Material Code and Volume Type and press Create Entry
button ( ):

Figure 6.91 Creating Entries

5. Press Save.

Figure 6.92 Record Created

Master Data Entity:

The Production application area operates using four basic types of master data entities:

• Producing Entities
o Fields
o Reservoirs Platforms
o Wells
• Well Completions
• Measurement Points
• Delivery Networks

The combination of the master data for Producing Entities, Well Completions and Measurement Points forms the
structure of a Delivery Network.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 187
Configuration Guide

In order to review the structure of a Delivery Network, you have to review the Delivery Network Upstream Nodes.
Refer to the SAP help portal link for further details:
http://help.sap.com/saphelp_rc10/helpdata/en/52/643843f5243246ba474ada8b30bb3b/content.htm?frameset=/en/d5/
8bdb38872d7a6ee10000000a11405a/frameset.htm&current_toc=/en/f1/9d2c3adcc8431be10000000a114084/plain.ht
m&node_id=66&show_children=false

Please refer to the step-by-step description of the tasks for Production Master Data in the following table:

Entity Description Transaction Codes Prerequisites

Field ID The field is required information for setting up the O3U_FLD1: Notification of 1st
Well Completion. It is informational only and has no Create Production is
functionality with-in PRA. O3U_FLD2: received for well
Change
O3U_FLD3:
Display
O3U_FLD6: Delete

Reservoir ID The reservoir is required information for setting up O3U_RES1: Notification of 1st
the Well Completion. It is informational only and has Create Production is
no functionality with-in PRA. O3U_RES2: received for well
Change
O3U_RES3:
Display
O3U_RES6:
Delete

Well ID The well is required information for setting up the O3U_WL1: Create Field ID
Well Completion. This represents the actual well O3U_WL2: Reservoir ID
bore. Change
O3U_WL3: Display
O3U_WL6: Delete

Well The well completion is the level at which all sales O3U_WC1: Create Well ID
Completion are allocated. The well completion number consists O3U_WC2:
(WC) ID of both the well ID plus a Well Completion identifier Change
for each related well completion in the well bore.
O3U_WC3:
The Country, State and County are identified on the
Display
transaction as well as the field and reservoir.
O3U_WC6: Delete

Well The well completion dated transaction identifies O3U_WCD1: Well Completion ID
Completion characteristics that may change over time. The Create
(WC) Dated different characteristics are: O3U_WCD2:
The well class identifies the well completion as an oil Change
well or gas well. This will determine whether oil, gas, O3U_WCD3:
casing head gas or condensate will be recorded in Display
the revenue distribution process.
O3U_WCD6:
The producing status identifies the well through its Delete
life cycle by being date effective so that the different

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 188
Configuration Guide

Entity Description Transaction Codes Prerequisites

stages of the well are identified such as (drilling,
producing, sold or temporarily abandoned). The
most important classification for the revenue
process is the tying of the cost center to the well
completion.

WC/MP The WC/MP transporter X-ref ties the WC or MP to O3U_MWT: Well Completion
Transporter the transporter. This transaction is used to identify Create Dated ID
Xref external meters that represent the sales meters that O3U_MWT2: MP Dated ID
are set up in Production. The default flag must be Change Transporter
set for the transporter to default on the MP volumes
O3U_MWT3:
transaction.
Display
O3U_MWT6:
Delete

Measurement Measurement points will be set up on oil (tanks and O3U_MP1: Create Prerequisite for
Point (MP) ID lact meters) and gas (gas sales meters) networks. O3U_MP2: building the network
The measurement points set up in SAP should Change
resemble the structures in the field. The Unit of
O3U_MP3: Display
Measure group is assigned and identifies the units
of measure to be used for the MP. Also the location
is identified.

Measurement The measurement point dated identifies if the MP is O3U_MPD1: Measurement Point
Point (MP) operated and determines if it is a sales point. If not Create ID
Dated ID set up as a sales point, sales volumes cannot be O3U_MPD2:
entered. All of the lact meters, tanks, and gas sales Change
meters will be set up as operated and as sales
O3U_MPD3:
meters.
Display
O3U_MPD3:
Delete

Delivery The Delivery Network is the structure that is built in O3U_DN1: Create Well Completion
Network(DN) PRA that is used for allocating production volumes O3U_DN2: Measurement points
from the sales points to the wells. The DN’s Change Allocation Profile
attributes are: The networks location and allocation
O3U_DN3: Display
tolerance. This is the % tolerance of the total of all
wells theoretical volumes to the actual volume. If the
tolerance is not met the network allocation will fail.

Deliver The Delivery Network Dated indicates if the network O3U_DND1: Delivery Network
Network (DN) is active and if it is an allocated network. The basis Create
Dated for determining an allocated network is the need for O3U_DND2:
sales points or if the volumes are entered at the Change
lowest level and need no further allocation to the
O3U_DND3:
well. The Measurement Group identifies how units of
Display
measure and related conditions, such as
temperature and pressure, are standardized. The O3U_DND6:
standardization allows for uniform conversion of Delete

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 189
Configuration Guide

Entity Description Transaction Codes Prerequisites

volumes. The allocation basis is determined as
volume, energy or dual.

DN The Delivery Network downstream node sets up the O3U_DNND1: Delivery Network
Downstream connections between Measurement Points and Well Create Dated
Node Completion to create the network structure. It is date O3U_DNND2: Measurement Point
sensitive so the network structure can be viewed as Change Dated
of any date.
O3U_DNND3: Well Completion
Display Dated
O3U_DNND6:
Delete
O3U_DNND9: List
Processing

DN Allocation The Delivery Network allocation profile identifies if O3U_DNAP1- DN Downstream

Profile the allocation is daily or monthly. The transaction Create Node
identifies what volume types will be allocated and in O3U_DNAP2 -
which order. Change
O3U_DNAP3 –
Display
O3U_DNAP6 –
Delete

MP Allocation The measurement point allocation profile determines O3U_MPAP1: DN Allocation Profile
Profile what product, volume type and if the volume is Create
optional or required. The monthly volumes will be O3U_MPAP2:
set as required and the daily volumes can be set as Change
optional or required. The network allocation will fail if
O3U_MPAP3:
the volume is not entered for a MP Allocation Profile
Display
with volume marked as required. A zero volume is
allowed to be entered if the volume is zero. O3U_MPAP6:
Delete

DN/WC The DN/WC theoretical calculation method identifies O3U_TCM1: Well Test data
Theoretical how the wells theoretical volume will be determined. Create
Calculation O3U_TCM2:
Method Change
O3U_TCM3:
Display
O3U_TCM6: Delete
O3U_TCM9: List
Process

MP Volumes Most of the monthly Measurement Point volumes O3U_MPVL: MP Allocation Profile
will be interfaced from the operators and loaded Create
using the ZPRA_LOAD transaction in SAP. O3U_MPVL:
Daily volumes can be extracted from Field Direct or Change
automatically uploaded when electronic meters are O3U_MPVL:

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 190
Configuration Guide

Entity Description Transaction Codes Prerequisites

in place. Sales volumes may need to be entered Display
separately since these numbers come in on a O3U_MPVL: Delete
different statement than what the operator provides.
O3U_MPVL: List
Process

WC Volumes Since all wells are metered there are no volumes O3U_WCDVL1: MP Allocation Profile
entered at the well level. Create
The well completion volumes will be determined O3U_WCDVL:
through the allocation process. Change
O3U_WCDVL:
Display
O3U_WCDVL:
Delete
O3U_WCDVL: List
Process

Allocation Once the network is set up and the daily or monthly DN Workplace:
Selection volumes are input the allocation process will be run Allocation Selection
to move the volumes from the sales points to the
wells. This transaction can be run as many times as
needed. This transaction allows a network or
groups of networks to be selected for allocation.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 191
Configuration Guide

7 Ownership

7.1 Partner

7.1.1 Assign Relevant Account Groups of Vendor

7.1.1.1 Use

You can use this procedure, you define which Account Groups you would like to use for Vendor. Account Groups
define the valid characteristics of Vendor.

7.1.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Partner → Assign Relevant Account
Groups of Vendor

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the Vendor Account Group name and before that we should maintain the Vendor Account Group name in
check table ( T077K )

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 192
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.1 Valid Vendor Accounts for Business Associates Overview

7.1.2 Assign Relevant Account Groups of Customer

7.1.2.1 Use

You can use this procedure, you define which Account Groups you would like to use for customer. Account Groups
define the characteristics of customer business associates.

7.1.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Partner → Assign Relevant Account
Groups of Customer

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the Customer Account Group Name and before that we should maintain the Customer Account Group
name in check table ( T077D )

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 193
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.2 Valid Customer Account Groups for Business Associates

7.1.3 Maintain Address Types

7.1.3.1 Use

You can use this procedure to add your own Address Types, which allows you to define additional addresses.

In the standard PRA BA maintenance as it is delivered, you can enter one address per business associate. However,
you might want to have more than one address per business associate. The reason is that, in certain business
situations, you might want a BA to have a delivery address that is different than the billing address. You might also
want to have a separate address to which the balancing report is sent.

7.1.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Partner → Maintain Address Type

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the of Address Group and Address Type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 194
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.3 Address Type Control Table Overview

7.2 Owner Request

7.2.1 Use

This section contains information about customizing related to the Owner Transfer Request, including setting up
number ranges, document types, reason codes, and reporting configuration.

7.2.2 Owner Request Global settings

7.2.2.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you configure the Owner Transfer Request process.
• The spool retention time is the number of days for which the reports generated by the background process will
be kept in the spool. After this number of days (the maximum is 9), the spool requests will be deleted by the
system, so it is necessary to either save a copy somewhere else, or print out a hardcopy of the reports.

• The trace flag is a technical trace that, when switched on, will generate a low-level trace of the functions
performed in the background process. It is strongly recommended that this flag NOT be set for customer use, as
it is only really needed by SAP developers to monitor program performance.

• The cross category BG default rule - Transfers field - (see the field description directly below this).

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 195
Configuration Guide

• The cross category BG default rule - Consolidation field - Allows the user to specify a default rule that is
proposed on the owner request when the owner request is being created. This rule is applicable during 100%
cross-category transfers involving bearer groups/burdens, in which the transferor bears 100% of costs.

You select one of the following as the default:

• A - Allow zero NRI owners and their bearer groups (transferor retains costs),

• B - Allocate burdens among available bearers (split costs among bearers pro rata bearer percent),

• C - Error, has to be handled manually (requires manual edit of bearer group).

• Document - In this column select if all the DOIs have to be assigned to a single accounting document or to
separate accounting documents. For example, if there are two DOIs D1 and D2 in the ownership request, both
the DOIs can be assigned to a single accounting document 1234 or to separate accounting documents 1234
and 1235.

• The archiving retention time is the number of days, after which, request documents will be archived in system
archiving

7.2.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Owner Request → Owner Request
Global settings

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Maintain the entries for the client.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 196
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.4 Store Ownership Request Default Settings Overview

7.2.3 Assign Number Ranges

7.2.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain Number Ranges.

In order for the Owner Request process to store data, Number Ranges must be set up. All Number Ranges are
stored as ranges of OIUOW_RQDC.

7.2.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Owner Request → Assign Number
Ranges

2. Choose Intervals.

3. Enter the interval details

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 197
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.5 Maintain Number Range Intervals

7.2.4 Owner Request Document Types

7.2.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain document types for Owner Transfer Requests.

Owner Transfer Request documents are linked with specific document types. These document types define the type
of request transaction that will be processed in the system, and, accordingly, what view of the data you will see when
running the transaction. You can enter data for the following fields:

• Document Type - A free-format number that is used to identify the various request document types.

• Document Type Description - A description of the document type will be displayed throughout the transfer
process. In most cases, the number will not be seen, but rather the description.

• Number Range Interval - Assign the number range Interval configured in the previous configuration step. (See
Assign Number Ranges)

• Request types - The four basic request types are: Transfer, Consolidation, Change, and Funds Only. These are
the basic functions of the Transfer process. The first 3 can be further configured to either include funds, or not.

• Funds flag - Set this flag if you want the transfer to include the Funds screen tab in the Owner Request
transaction.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 198
Configuration Guide

Note:
The Funds flag is NOT VALID for the Funds only Request type.

7.2.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Owner Request → Owner Request
Document Types

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the details for the document type.

Figure 7.6 Ownership Request Document Types Overview

7.2.5 Transfer Reason Codes

7.2.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure Transfer Reason Codes.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 199
Configuration Guide

When creating an Owner Transfer Request (transaction O3UOW_OR0) a Reason Code must be given for the activity
associated with that document. You can set the Reason Codes in this activity.

7.2.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Owner Request → Transfer Reason
Codes

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the of transfer reason codes

Figure 7.7 Ownership Transfer Codes TBLRV013 Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 200
Configuration Guide

7.3 Schedule 'A' Report Field Configuration

7.3.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can suppress various fields for the Schedule A reports that are generated in Ownership.
Suppressing the field means that the (standard) field will not be displayed on your system.

There are two Schedule 'A' Reports:

• Division Order Schedule 'A' Report
• Ownership Transfer Schedule 'A' Report

In the first level of the maintenance dialog, choose one or both reports, depending on which you want to maintain.
Once chosen, select that record and double-click the 'Fields to Suppress' folder. This takes you to the second level of
the maintenance dialog. Here you can choose which fields you do not wish to be output on the relevant Schedule 'A'
Report.

7.3.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Schedule ‘A’ Report Field
Configuration

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Select the name of the Schedule 'A' Report.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 201
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.8 Schedule 'A' Reports Overview

4. Select the schedule ‘A’ Report and double-click the field to suppress and add the address etc.

Figure 7.9 Fields to Suppress Overview of Selected Set

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 202
Configuration Guide

7.4 Maintain Suspense Reason Codes

7.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set the Suspense Reason Codes that are to be valid in your system. The Suspense Reasons
are reasons why an owner cannot be paid.

If you want to maintain your own Suspense Reason Codes, select Change and then New Entries. Maintain the new
Suspense Reason Codes, and then save.

7.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Maintain Suspense Reason Codes

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the Suspense Reason Codes and Suspense Reason Codes description.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 203
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.10 Suspense Reason Codes Overview

7.5 Legal Description

7.5.1 Use

Legal descriptions can be set up at both the joint venture and the division of Interest levels. Please refer to the sub-
nodes under this node for information on how to customize the various components of legal description.

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Legal Description

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 204
Configuration Guide

7.5.2 Maintain Legal Description Field Codes

7.5.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Legal Description Field Codes and field attributes which will be used in the base DOI
and venture transactions. Legal Description Fields are used to identify a DOI geographically.

7.5.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Legal Description→ Maintain legal
description field codes

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the Field name and format and Description of the field.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 205
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.11 Legal Description Fields Overview

4. Select any one of the fields and double-click the field attribute.

Figure 7.12 Field Attributes Details

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 206
Configuration Guide

7.5.3 Assign Legal Description Fields to Legal

Description Type Codes

7.5.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you assign the Legal Description Fields to Legal Description Types (this is a follow-on activity to
the activity immediately above - Maintain Legal Description Fields). This helps you create fields, which you can use to
geographically identify divisions of interest.

7.5.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Legal Description → Assign legal
description field to legal description type codes

2. Choose New Entries.

3. Enter the Legal Description Type and Description

Figure 7.13 Legal Description Type Overview

4. Select the Legal Description and double-click the Legal Desc Fields.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 207
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.14 Legal Desc Fields Overview

7.6 Maintain Combined Product Codes

7.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure Combined Product Codes.

The PRA product comes standard with the following Combined Product Codes:
• C01 = All products
• C02 = Gas/NGLs (natural gas liquids)
• C03 = All liquids - crude, condensate, NGLs
• C04 = Oil, condensate

You can add to them in the table in this IMG activity, to reflect product codes that you will be using at your company,
which are not covered by the standard Combined Product Codes. There is a separate control table with an SAP
namespace, and customer namespace for that purpose.

7.6.1.1 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Maintain Combined Product Codes

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 208
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.15 Combined Product Code Overview

2. Choose New Entries.

Figure 7.16 Adding New Entries

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 209
Configuration Guide

7.7 Combined Product Code/Major Product Code Cross

Reference

7.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Combined Product Code / Major Product Code Cross Reference. It lists the
major PRA product codes that are combined to create a single PRA Combined Product Code. The Combined Product
Code is used when setting up the division of interest in PRA Ownership. The Combined Product Code represents a
grouping of products, and is used to tie the division of interest to the delivery network(s).

The division of interest combined product must have a product that matches the product for the related delivery
network. For example, the division of interest cannot be defined for gas when the delivery network needs to be
processed and valued for oil.

Requirements
The Major Product Codes must have already been defined.

7.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Combined Product Code/Major
Product Code Cross Reference

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 210
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.17 Combined Product Code/Major Product Code Overview

2. Choose New Entries and maintain the details.

Figure 7.18 Adding New Entries

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 211
Configuration Guide

7.8 Venture Status Codetable

7.8.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the PRA Venture Status. It lists the activity statuses for the PRA Venture. This
attribute of the PRA Venture has a corresponding effective date on the PRA Venture transaction so that changes in
the activity status of the venture can be tracked by date.

The PRA Venture Status is for information and ad hoc reporting purposes only and is not used for any processing
logic in the PRA system.

7.8.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Venture status Code Table

Figure 7.19 PRA Venture Status Code Table Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 212
Configuration Guide

2. Click New Entry.

Figure 7.20 Adding New Entries

7.9 Partner Integration

7.9.1 Global settings

7.9.2 Use

In this IMG activity, you activate the interface that you intend to use. To do that, set the 'active' flag. Subsequent
processing will use the settings from the active interface. Note that only one interface can be active at one time.

In the fields on the screen, enter the following data:

• Interface Name - A free-form name assigned to the interface.
• Outbound RFC Destination - The RFC destination for out-bound communication.
• OB Max retry - For out-bound communications, this is the maximum number of 'failed' times a business object
will attempt to integrate with the partner system. Once the threshold number is reached, the business object will
be ignored in out-bound communications.
• OB Max batch - For out-bound communications, this is the maximum number of records that can be put together
in a batch in one communication with the partner system. In the out-bound process, once this threshold is
reached, records that are in a valid processing status will not be considered in that particular communication.
Those are then candidates for the next communication process.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 213
Configuration Guide

7.9.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Partner Integration → Global setting

Active indicator
How you set this flag determines how master data is dealt with in your system, and if there will be interfacing to third-
party systems for master data maintenance.

• Set the flag - If you want the partner interfaces that have been defined to be enabled for Ownership. Setting the
flag allows external third-party ownership systems to interface ownership data to SAP. If you set the flag, certain
Ownership master data maintenance transactions will not be available - they will only be available in display
mode. Setting the flag means that you are choosing to use third-party software for master data maintenance.

• Do not set the flag - If you want to use the standard PRA Ownership master data maintenance; if you want
Ownership to be your primary master data maintenance system.

2. Click New Entry.

Figure 7.21 Adding New Entries

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 214
Configuration Guide

7.9.4 Commands

7.9.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure the Commands. The interface uses the combination of Commands and business
objects to invoke the relevant service API (application programming interface).

In the Interface Commands Table (the customizing table on the activity screen for this activity), enter the following:
• In the Update SAP values field, enter: In-bound
• In the Copy object data field, enter: In-bound
• In the Funds deletion notification field, enter: out-bound
• In the Query SAP values field, enter: In-bound

7.9.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Partner Integration → Commands

Figure 7.22 Commands Overview

2. Choose New Entries to maintain new entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 215
Configuration Guide

7.9.5 Business Object Services

7.9.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the objects that will be integrated with the partner application, and the Object
Services that support the various functions to be carried out.

7.9.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Partner Integration → Business
Object Services

Figure 7.23 Object Overview

2. Select Object type and double-click the service.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 216
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.24 Service Overview

7.9.6 Maintain System Number Range Intervals for

Outbound Connection ID

7.9.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the System Number Range Intervals for the Connection ID, for all outbound partner
integration.

The Connection ID is the unique identifier of each http Post session opened for communication between SAP and the
partner system.

7.9.6.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Partner Integration → Maintain
System Number Range Intervals for Outbound Connection ID

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 217
Configuration Guide

Figure 7.25 Maintain System Number Range Intervals for Outbound Connection ID

7.10 Marketing Free Maintenance

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Marketing Free Maintenance

7.10.1 Maintain Mkt. Free Number ranges

7.10.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the Number Range for Marketing Free Maintenance

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 218
Configuration Guide

7.10.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Marketing Free Maintenance →
Maintain Mkt. Free Number ranges

Figure 7.26 Maintain Mkt. Free Number Ranges

7.11 Dynamic SD Instruction

7.11.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the Dynamic SD Instruction

A “DSD Instruction” is a generic drop-down-value field made available for maintenance on a DOI Owner record. This
is an optional field that is used for the Dynamic Settlement Diversity (DSD) feature of PRA Valuation. A customer can
freely define any values in this field.
The values and corresponding descriptions become part of a drop-down list in DOI Owner, where a DOI Owner
record can be assigned a value from the list. This value is then passed to the DSD rule framework for evaluation in
custom rules.
For example, a customer could define a possible DSD Instruction as “USE_NMGASFED” to be used to identify cases
where the SD formula NMGASFED should be applied in a DSD rule.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 219
Configuration Guide

7.11.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Ownership → Dynamic SD Instruction

Figure 7.27 Dynamic SD Instruction

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 220
Configuration Guide

8 Contracts and Pricing

8.1 Processing Contract Number Range Maintenance

8.1.1 Use

8.1.2 Activities

In this IMG activity you maintain system Number Range Intervals for Contracts.

Further notes
Every time a new client is added to the system, you must create new Number Range Intervals for that client.

8.1.3 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Processing Contract
Number Range Maintenance

Refer to the number range setup to maintain the Contracts Number Range.

8.2 Define Contract Groups

8.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you assign Contract Types to a Contract Group. A single Contract Type may exist in multiple
groups.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 221
Configuration Guide

Example
The contract type OIL SALE may exist in the following Contract Groups
• CRUDE-OIL-COND-CONTRACT-TYPE
• VALID-OIL-COND-SALES-CONTRACT
• VALID-SALES-CONTRACT

8.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Define Contract Groups

2. On Defining Number Range Interval Screen, maintain the required entries using the reference below.

Figure 8.1 Contract Type Group Overview

3. Choose Save.

4. Choose Back.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 222
Configuration Guide

8.3 Maintain PRA Contract Type Cross Reference

8.3.1 Use

Use this activity to enter Contract Types, which identify the different types of Contracts that are available for a Sales
Document. For Production and Revenue Accounting, the valid Sales Document is EP.

8.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Maintain PRA Contract
Type Cross Reference

2. Maintain the contract cross reference based on the business requirements (example, refer the screen shot)

Figure 8.2 PRA Contract Type Cross Reference

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 223
Configuration Guide

8.4 Define the Posting Co., Gravity ID, and Scale

Definition and Default Codes

8.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the codes used for processing Oil and Gas Pricing. You can define codes for:
• Posting companies, which include the Oil and Natural Gas posting companies (for example, Chevron WTI or
Inside FERC TGPL)
• Gravity scale ID (ID on price Posting bulletin)
• Gravity scale definition
• Gravity scale default (default for Posting)

8.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Define the Posting
Co., Gravity ID, & Scale Definition and Default Codes

2. Maintain the Gravity ID details, followed by the Posting Company. The Gravity scale and Definitions can be
maintained for the Posting Company.

Figure 8.3 Gravity ID Overview

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 224
Configuration Guide

8.5 Define Quotation Groups and Group Items

8.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define Quotation Groups for the condition type EP00, to be used on the formula
screen. The Quotation Group is used for complex formulas including the highest, lowest, and average of Multiple
Quotations (price bulletins or indices).
You can also define a Group Item, which is a quotation that is proposed when maintaining a formula.

8.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Define Quotation Groups
and Group Items

2. Maintain the quotations groups first followed by the Group items for Quotations based on business requirements.
Some of the common Quotations can be seen in the screenshot below.

Figure 8.4 Maintain Quotation Groups Overview

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 225
Configuration Guide

8.6 Define Quotation Types (uses Downstream

Functions)

8.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the Quotation Types for Quotations. The type is a characteristic of the Quotation.
It is used primarily when a price is entered that is the result of a calculation from an external source. (For example, a
Pricing Service calculates an average of multiple Quotations and sends the results to SAP.)

8.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Define Quotation Types
(Uses Downstream Functions)

2. Maintain the Quotation Type as required by the business. Some of the commonly used Quotation Types can be
seen in the screenshot.

Figure 8.5 View for Quotation Types Overview

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 226
Configuration Guide

8.7 Define Quotation Data (Link to Downstream

Functions)

8.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can describe the Quotations (that is, the Price Bulletins and Index) to be used for formula
Pricing.

8.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Define Quotation Data
(Link to Downstream Functions)

2. Maintain the Quotation Data as required by the business. The screenshot may be used as reference to maintain
the records. Use F1 help to get more details for the fields being maintained.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 227
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.6 Quotations (Origin and Type) for Prices Overview

8.8 Change the Marketing Cost Description

8.8.1 Use

Use this activity to change the Marketing Cost Description as required.

8.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Change the Marketing
Cost Description

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 228
Configuration Guide

2. Maintain the Marketing Cost descriptions as required. The following screenshot may serve as a reference.

Figure 8.7 Maintain View for OIU_CM_MKT Overview

8.9 Maintain Contract Types Requiring Sale Type Code

for Dual Accounting

8.9.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you can maintain Contract Types that require sale type code for dual accounting.

8.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Maintain Contract Types
Requiring Sale Type Code for Dual Accounting

2. Maintain the contract types requiring Sales Type Code for dual accounting as required.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 229
Configuration Guide

8.10 Define Brand Codes

8.10.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define Brand Codes. Brand Codes are used in determining the Contract Pricing Record. The
Brand Code designates the brand of oil being sold or purchased (like the 'Crude Type'). The code is useful in pricing
information, and is used in pricing, reporting, comparisons, and monitoring within the Oil industry. The Brand Code is
used in RD, JE, and VL (for example, it exists in RD structure SM_BRD_CD). On the MPVD table (Measurement
Point Dated), there is a Crude Type code. The Brand Code is a replacement for the Crude Type, which was used
previously in PRA.

8.10.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Contracts and Pricing → Define Brand Codes

2. Maintain the Brand Codes as required. The following screenshot may serve as a reference.

Figure 8.8 Brand Codes Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 230
Configuration Guide

8.11 Contracts and Pricing Master Data

8.11.1 Purpose

The Contracts and Pricing application area in Production Revenue Accounting (PRA) supports the maintenance of
contracts and related marketing costs, pricing terms, and prices for the sale of products including crude oil,
condensate, and natural gas.

For more details refer SAP help

8.12 PRA Contract Maintenance (O3UCM_CONTRACTS)

8.12.1 Use

Contracts are used by the PRA Production, Product Control, Contractual Allocation and Valuation application areas.
There are different Contract Types, and for each one there is a unique template that is used to enter contract data.

8.12.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Contracts → Create Contract. The Create Contract: Initial screen appears.

2. Enter the contract type and choose Enter.

Typically you would need an Oil sale contract to process oil materials through CA and Valuation. Materials should
have a corresponding sales contract to be processed by PRA.

User has the option to select the Contract Type followed by the option to use the system Number Range or user
entered values. Once the contract screen is reached necessary entries can be made to create a Contract.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 231
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.9 PRA Contract Maintenance - Create

3. More details about creation of contract can be found here.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 232
Configuration Guide

8.13 Pricing Terms-Create Condition (VK11)

8.13.1 Use

Use the following procedures as required in order to enter data that is necessary for the system to calculate pricing.

8.13.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Contracts → Pricing Terms → Create Condition.

2. Enter the condition type as EP01(fixed pricing) and hit enter.

Figure 8.10 Create Condition Records

3. Select the level which the Pricing needs to be maintained and click OK.

4. The subsequent screen allows you to maintain Pricing Condition using material and currency for the Contract.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 233
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.11 PRA Fixed Price Condition: Fast Entry

5. Additional detail about the Formula Pricing and Pricing conditions can be found here.

8.14 CO2 Removal Fee Processing (O3UCP_CO2_RMV0)

8.14.1 Use

Use this transaction to create or maintain CO2 Removal Fees that are incurred when a gas plant has to remove CO2
from a gas product that is being processed through the plant. Normally, the originating property injects CO2 into the
well in order to produce more products from the well, but since CO2 dilutes the product quality, it must then be
removed from the gas.

8.14.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics →Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Contracts → Other Terms → CO2 Removal Fee Processing.

2. Click Create button and maintain the values as required by the business.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 234
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.12 Create CO2 Removal Fee Processing: Maintenance View

3. Click here for additional details.

8.15 Contract Marketing Costs (O3UCP_MKT_CST0)

8.15.1 Use

Use this transaction to create and maintain marketing costs at the Contract, Contract / Measurement Point, or
Contract / Well Completion Level. Marketing costs are the costs involved in taking a product to market.

8.15.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Contracts → Other Terms → Contract Marketing Costs.

2. Click the Create button and maintain the values as required by the business.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 235
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.13 Create Contracting Marketing Costs: Maintenance View

3. Click here for additional details.

8.16 UCA Rate Maintenance (/PRA/FF_UCA_MAINT)

8.16.1 Use

Use this transaction to create and maintain marketing costs at Contract, Contract / Measurement Point, or Contract /
Well Completion Level. Marketing costs are the costs involved in taking a product to market.

8.16.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Contracts → Other Terms → UCA Rate Maintenance.

2. Click Create and maintain the values as required by the business.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 236
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.14 Field Fuel UCA Rate Maintenance - Initial Screen

The record can be maintained at different levels as shown above.

8.17 Tax and Royalty Reimbursement

(O3UCP_TAR_RMB0)

8.17.1 Use

Use this transaction to create and maintain both Contract Tax Reimbursement terms and exceptions related to the
settlement of certain government royalties and taxes between the seller and the purchaser.

8.17.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Contracts → Other Terms → Tax and Royalty Reimbursement.

2. Click Create and maintain the values as required by the business.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 237
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.15 Tax and Royalty: Create

The record can be maintained at different levels as shown above and more details can be found here.

8.18 Formula Repository (O3UI7)

8.18.1 Use

Use this transaction to create formulas to be used when creating Pricing Conditions.

8.18.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Pricing → Formula Repository → Create.

2. Click the Create button and maintain the values as required by the business.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 238
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.16 Repository: Create F&A Formula

3. The additional details can be found here.

8.19 Prices (O3U_PP2)

8.19.1 Use

Use this transaction to create formulas to be used when creating Pricing Conditions.

8.19.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Pricing → Prices → Maintain. The Determine Work Area: Entry screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 239
Configuration Guide

Figure 8.17 Determine Work Area: Entry

2. Enter data as required to select one quotation, then choose Enter. The Change View Price Posting Maintenance:
Overview screen appears.

3. To add a new entry, choose New Entries. The New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen appears.

4. Enter the quote date, bulletin number, and price. The Gravity Scale does not need to be entered, because it
defaults based on the Pricing Configuration.

5. Save the Price Posting.

8.20 Gravity Scales (O3U_SCM2)

8.20.1 Use

Use this transaction to add Gravity Scales for Crude Oil postings.

8.20.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Contracts and
Pricing → Pricing → Gravity Scales -→> Maintain Gravity Scales.

2. Choose New Entries and enter the following data as required.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 240
Configuration Guide

• In the Src. field, enter the Posting Company.

• In the Grv field, enter the Gravity Scale code, which is the posting company ID of the Gravity Scale.

3. In the From column, enter the effective From date. In the To column, enter the effective To date and in the Base
column enter the Base Gravity. Then enter the Density Type.

4. Save the Gravity Scale.

5. The additional details can be found here.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 241
Configuration Guide

9 Sales and Balancing

9.1 Contractual allocation

9.1.1 Define Sliding Scale Properties

9.1.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity you enter the data required to set up a Sliding Scale method which is used in the Gas Plant
Sliding Scale transaction (Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Sales and Balancing → Contractual
Allocations → Gas Plant Processing → Gas Plant Sliding Scale).

The system uses the Sliding Scale method to calculate the return to Lease Percentage that is specified in the Gas
Plant Agreement between the plant and lease owners.

9.1.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Define Sliding
Scale Properties

2. Maintain the sliding scale dimensions (by clicking New Entries) to be used for Sliding Scale method and
associate corresponding function module with it, which the system uses to calculate a value.

Note
To define a new Sliding Scale method, you must create a function module with new calculation details and
then tie the function module to the dimension at the Sliding Scale Dimensions Overview screen.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 242
Configuration Guide

Figure 9.1 Sliding Scale Dimensions Overview

3. Maintain the Sliding Scale method (by clicking New Entries) to be used and maintain the corresponding Sliding
Scale levels (by clicking New Entries) for each method.

4. Save the configurations for Sliding Scale dimension, method and level.

Figure 9.2 Sliding Scale Method/Levels Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 243
Configuration Guide

9.1.2 Define Product Control Not Selling Reason Codes

9.1.2.1 Use

In this activity you can assign the Not Selling Reason Codes for the Availability transaction.
• Standard settings
• NM Not Market
• NS Not Selling

9.1.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Define Product
Control Not Selling Properties

2. Maintain the Not Selling Reason Codes and its description in the configuration (by clicking New Entries).

3. Save the configuration.

Figure 9.3 Not Selling Reason Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 244
Configuration Guide

9.1.3 Create Contractual Allocation Server Group

9.1.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can set up a Server Group and assign servers to it for Contractual Allocation (CA)
background processing purposes.

Setting up a Server Group can be useful because without it the standard CA processing will create background jobs
across all available background processes within an SAP system via standard batch process load balancing. In a
case where a large amount of allocation jobs are submitted at the same time, all available background process
queues will be filled and other jobs of equal priority will not be able to execute in a timely manner. This may present a
problem for customers with particular business practices.

However, with a CA server group, the Contractual Allocation process can then target specific servers during job
submission. (When you set up a server group, you specify a limited number of servers within the group.) During the
Contractual Allocation job submission, all Contractual Allocation background jobs will be submitted in a round robin
manner only to those servers that are specified within the Server Group. This allows other application servers to
remain available for other processes within the SAP system.

Note
The SAP concept of Server Groups is used in a load balancing context. RFC Server Groups are used in
asynchronous remote function calls which utilizes dialog processes. However, CA executes purely in the
background utilizing batch processes. NONE of the load balancing configurations attached to the CA Server
Group which the customer can create is considered because of this.

9.1.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Create
Contractual Allocation Server Group

Use this activity to set up a Contractual Allocation Server Group and assign servers to it.

2. At the CCMS: RFC Server Group Maintenance screen, review the following:
• Log-on group (the Server Group)
• Instance (the specific server), and
• Status (the status of the assignment of the server to the Server Group)

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 245
Configuration Guide

3. Choose Create Assignment to access the Create Assignment dialog box, and then enter a name for the server
group in the Server group field as well as the name of the server to include in the Server Group in the Instance
field.

4. Complete other fields in the Create Assignment dialog box as required and choose Copy. Then save your
entries.

5. After you have assigned the server(s) to the Server Group, use the Assign Server Group to Contractual
Allocation activity, which you can access in Customizing under Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Production and
Revenue Accounting) → Sales and Balancing → Assign Server Group to Contractual Allocation, to assign the
CA Server Group to CA batch processing.

Figure 9.4 RFC Server Group Maintenance

9.1.4 Assign Server Group to Contractual Allocation

9.1.4.1 Use

In this activity, you can assign Server Groups to be used for batch processing in Contractual Allocation (CA).

If Contractual Allocations are submitted via a delivery network group when a Server Group is not specified for CA
batch processing jobs, all batch processing jobs within an SAP system may be queued up along with the batch
processing jobs, thereby preventing other non-CA jobs of equal priority from being executed in a timely manner.

By specifying a Server Group solely for CA batch processing jobs, you optimize the system's execution of all batch
processing jobs. When you specify a Server Group for CA batch processing jobs, the system then routes non-CA
batch processing jobs to available servers that are not part of the CA Server Group.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 246
Configuration Guide

During CA job submission, the system reads the Server Group that you specify here in order to determine which
servers will be targeted for Contractual Allocations.

You can specify one dedicated Server Group for Contractual Allocation, or you can specify the same Server Group to
be used for both Contractual Allocation and Volume Allocation.

9.1.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Assign Server
Group to Contractual Allocation

2. Assign the CA server group to CA batch processing (by clicking “New Entries”).

9.1.4.3 Prerequisite

The Server Group is set up via the Create Contractual Allocation Server Group activity in Customizing, Industry
Solution Oil & Gas (Production and Revenue Accounting) → Sales and Balancing → Create Contractual Allocation
Server Group.

In the Process field, choose Contractual Allocation Job Submission. Then in the Logon/Server Group field, specify
the Server Group to be used for Contractual Allocation batch processing.

Figure 9.5 Server Group Assignment Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 247
Configuration Guide

9.1.5 Define CA Entitlement Volume Types

9.1.5.1 Use

Use this activity to enter Volume Types for which Contractual Allocations will process Entitlement information.

9.1.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Define CA
Entitlement Volume Types

2. Maintain Country, Primary Geo Location, Major Product Code, Minor Product Code and the corresponding
Volume Type (by clicking New Entries).

3. Save the Volume Type configuration.

Figure 9.6 CA Allocation Entitlement Volume Types

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 248
Configuration Guide

9.1.6 Define Global Settings for Contractual Allocation

9.1.6.1 Use

You use this Customizing activity to define whether you want to run the new set of contractual allocation (CA)
methods with the related set of configurations.

9.1.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Define Global
Settings for Contractual Allocation

You can do the following things

• Select the way to run contractual Allocation methods
Here you can define whether you want to run the existing CA methods or the enhanced/new ones.

Note
Allocating the rounding difference and starting entitlement calculations are valid only if you select this setting
to run the new way.

• Allocate the rounding difference

Here you can define that in case of any rounding errors (while running a CA method), that quantity should be
allocated to either the owner(s) having the highest GRI percentage within the Division of Interest (DOI) or the
owner(s) having the highest GRI percentage within your company.

• Start entitlement calculation

Here you can define whether you want to trigger the start of the entitlement calculation at the venture/DOI level or at
the termination point level.

2. Select the corresponding radio button to define how the CA will run.

3. Save the global settings CA configuration.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 249
Configuration Guide

Figure 9.7 PRA - Global Settings for Contractual Allocations

9.1.7 Create Contractual Allocation Gas Analysis

Combined Component

9.1.7.1 Use

In this Customizing activity, you can create and maintain Combined Components for Gas Analysis.

9.1.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Create
Contractual Allocation Gas Analysis Combined Component

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 250
Configuration Guide

2. Maintain the Combined Component (by clicking New Entries) & its description.

3. Maintain the components (by clicking New Entries) under the Combined Components and save the configuration
for Combined Component and their sub components.

Figure 9.8 Components Under Combined Component

9.1.8 Miscellaneous Activities

Setup DN Dated: T Code: O3U_DND1

• Pick a Measurement Group consistent with your State

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 251
Configuration Guide

Figure 9.9 T Code: OCU_DND1

Marketing Groups & ACRs need to be created if their respected checkboxes are not selected.
For Marketing Groups, T Code: O3U_CA011
For ACR, T Code: O3U_CA021

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 252
Configuration Guide

Figure 9.10 Marketing Groups T Code: O3U_CA011; ACR T Code: O3U_CA021

CT quantities by sales point is to be maintained if SPO method is selected in DN Dated as shown above.
T Code (CT Quantities by Sales Point): O3U_CA052

SPF statement volumes is to be maintained if it is required to allocate secondary products from an outside plant.
T Code (SPF Statement Volumes): O3U_CA071

Manual entry volumes are to be maintained if any of the manual entry methods is selected in DN Dated.
T Code (CA Manual Entry): O3U_CA031

Master data to be maintained in gas analysis portal if ‘Chemical analysis method’ is selected in DN Dated.
T Code (CA Gas Analysis Portal): /PRA/CA_GA_PORTAL

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 253
Configuration Guide

Setup Sales Contract: T Code: O3UCM_CONTRACT

• Pay close attention to the entities you tie to in these setups
o E.g. Sold To, Marketing Rep
• Do not forget to approve when complete

Figure 9.11 PRA Contract Maintenance

Maintain MP to Transporter Cross Reference: T Code: O3U_MWT1

Maintain MP/WC Transporter Contract Cross Reference: T Code: O3UCA_TRNCT

9.2 Balancing

9.2.1 Define Adjustment Reason Codes

9.2.1.1 Use

Use this activity to set up Reason Codes for manual adjustments. When manual adjustments are entered into the
system, a user can enter a corresponding Reason Code for the adjustment which is then available for printing with
the adjustment on the statement.

Note
The new balancing solution uses the same adjustment Reason Codes as the old solution.
If you are using the old solution, in order to prevent additional setup, review all of the old solution codes. Any
codes from the old solution are contained in the same table in which the adjustment Reason Codes entered
in this activity are stored.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 254
Configuration Guide

9.2.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Define
Adjustment Reason Codes

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain Balancing direct input Transaction Reason Code and description.

4. Maintain all the relevant codes and save.

Figure 9.12 Balancing Direct Input Transaction Reason Codes

9.2.2 Maintain Valid Smartforms for Balancing

Statement

9.2.2.1 Use

Use this activity to specify Smartforms that are available for use with the Balancing Workplace. You can add
Smartforms as they are created.

SAP provides the Smartform ROIUBL01_SSFO_BALANCING.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 255
Configuration Guide

9.2.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Balancing
Statement→ Maintain Valid Smartforms for Balancing Statement

2. Maintain the Smartform name type and its description in the view (by clicking New Entries) and save the
configuration.

Figure 9.13 Balancing Reporting Valid Smartforms

9.2.3 Define Default Smartform

9.2.3.1 Use

Use this activity to specify the default Smartform from among the Smart Form(s) that were specified in the Maintain
valid SmartForms for balancing statement activity.

9.2.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Balancing
Statement→ Define Default Smart Form

2. Assign the default Smartform to be used to generate balancing statement.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 256
Configuration Guide

Note
If a customized Smartform has not been created yet for your company, leave the SAP default Smartform
name ROIUBL01_SSFO_BALANCING in the Smartform field.

Figure 9.14 Balancing Configuration

9.2.4 Define/Maintain Product Balancing Agreement

Groups

9.2.4.1 Use

Use this activity to enter a name for a production balancing agreement (PBA) group.

The purpose of PBA groups is to group related PBAs together. For instance, you could group PBAs that are related
to the same geographical area. Further, PBA groups could be used for the following tasks:
• Running sets of PBA statements
• Querying and analyzing PBA data
• Restricting authorization

Consider carefully how you would like to establish a naming convention for a PBA group so that the PBA group name
is meaningful for these tasks.

Further notes
Required Set Up Before Running Migration Programs

Note that when migrating data from the old Balancing solution to the new Balancing solution, you must assign each
migrated PBA to a PBA group.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 257
Configuration Guide

9.2.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Balancing
Statement → Define/Maintain Product Balancing Agreement Groups

2. Maintain the PBA Group & its associated text in the view (by clicking “New Entries”) and save the configuration.

Figure 9.15 Balancing - PBA Group

9.2.5 Define/Maintain Balancing Product Groups

9.2.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Balancing
Statement → Define/Maintain Balancing Product Groups

Activity 1 of 2 - Define/Maintain Balancing Product Groups

Use this activity to enter a name for a Product Group (by clicking New Entries). The Product Group name(s) will
appear on the statement.

You can enter a name for the group up to three characters, such as GAS, OIL, etc.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 258
Configuration Guide

Figure 9.16 Balancing Product Group

Activity 2 of 2 - Define/Maintain Product Group Cross-reference

Use this activity to assign combinations of major and minor Product Codes to a Product Group name.

1. After you select this activity, in the Balancing Product Group field enter the Balancing Product Group code (by
clicking New Entries).

2. At the Display View Balancing Product Group Xref Overview screen, enter the following data as required:
• Major product code in the Pd field.
• The minor product code in the Product field.

3. Repeat Step 2 as required, then save your entries.

Required Set Up Before Running Migration Programs

Note that only the following entities that contain products within a balancing product group will be migrated:
• PBAs
• PBA to well completion/measurement point cross references
• Adjustments

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 259
Configuration Guide

Figure 9.17 Balancing Product Group Xref

9.2.6 Define Balancing Message Types

9.2.6.1 Use

Use this activity to define the type of message (such as an error message or an information message) for the
customizable messages listed below.

9.2.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Sales and Balancing → Balancing
Statemen t→ Define Balancing Message Types

2. In the application Area field, enter OIUBL.

3. In the MsgNo fields, enter the following message numbers (by clicking New Entries):
• 122
Indicates that the Well Completions or Measurement Points attached to the PBA are not all from the same DOI. This
message is issued during report generation online as well as in the background.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 260
Configuration Guide

• 124
Indicates that all of the Well Completions or Measurement Points attached to the PBA are form the same DOI, but not
all of the Well Completions or Measurement Points attached to the DOI are in the same PBAs Well Completion /
Measurement Point Cross-Reference.

• 125
Indicates that the Well Completions or Measurement Points attached to the PBA are not all from the same DOI. This
message is issued from the Balancing Workplace transaction during the setup of the PBA to the WC/MP Cross-
Reference.

• 126
Currently not used.

4. In the Online and BatchI fields, enter the code identifying the Message Type that is to correspond with the
message as required. (Use the Online field to enter a code for online messages and the Batchl field to enter a
code for batch messages.)
• E (error)
• W (warning)
• S (success)
• I (information)
• (do not print at all)

Figure 9.18 Message Control by User

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 261
Configuration Guide

9.2.7 Miscellaneous Activities

User Balancing Reports

Edit No. 28 needs to be switched on in SPRO → PRA → Global Settings → Activate Configurable Edits to execute
the T-code O3UBL01_REPORTS.

T Code O3UBL01_Reports: This transaction is for User Balancing Reports. On entering this transaction, there are 9
options available to choose from. There are options for System Verification Reports, Control Reports & Partner
Reporting.

Figure 9.19 Balancing - User Reports

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 262
Configuration Guide

10 Revenue Accounting

10.1 Valuation

10.1.1 Maintain the Dialog Process Limit for VL Doc.

10.1.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity you specify the number of Dialog Processes that should be used for Valuation and Revenue
Distribution processing at certain times.

In the No of Processes field you specify the total number of processes that should be used across all application
servers, and in the Num Free Dialog field you specify the number of processes that should not be used by VL/RD
processing for each application server. In the Hour active field, you enter the corresponding hour in military time.

10.1.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Valuation →
Maintain the Dialog Process Limit for VL Doc

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain Allowed concurrent and free dialog processes for VL/RD.

4. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 263
Configuration Guide

Figure 10.1 Allowed Concurrent and Free Dialog Processes View

10.1.2 Create Valuation Server Group

10.1.2.1 Use

The standard PRA Valuation process will create background jobs across all available background processes within
an SAP system via standard batch process load balancing. However, if a large amount of allocation jobs are
submitted at the same time, all available background process queues on available servers will be filled, and other
same priority jobs will not be able to execute in a timely manner. This may present a problem in some situations for
specific customers. For that reason, SAP has made this option available in Customizing. You can choose to
"dedicate" servers in server groups to be used only for volume allocation.

When you set this up here, the Valuation process will target specific servers during job submission. The concept of
server groups is used to do that. A server group can be created to only include a set number of defined servers.
During the volume allocation job submission, all background jobs will be submitted to each of the defined servers in
the server group in a 'round robin' manner. This will allow various application servers to NOT be included in the
server group, thus leaving them available for other processes within the SAP system.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 264
Configuration Guide

10.1.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Valuation →
Create Valuation Server Group

Figure 10.2 RFC Server Group Maintenance

10.1.3 Assign Server Group to Valuation

10.1.3.1 Use

In this activity, you can dedicate a server group to be used in your system, which will then be used for Valuation
background processing. This optional activity can assist you in improving volume allocation performance.

By dedicating a server group to Valuation, you can avoid a situation in which allocation processing using a delivery
network group could cause batch processes within an SAP System to have too many allocation jobs, thus not
allowing other jobs to be run in an efficient manner. The server group targets a selected group of servers, instead of
all available servers within an SAP system. The assignment that you set up is read by the Valuation process during
job submission in order to determine which servers will be used.

You can put Valuation on one dedicated server group, or you can put it on a server group together with Volume
Allocation (VA) and Contractual Allocation (CA) background processing.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 265
Configuration Guide

10.1.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Valuation →
Assign Server Group to Valuation

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

10.1.4 Maintain Theoretical Wet Gas cost Calc. basis for

Dual Accounting

10.1.4.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you can maintain the cost basis used in the Dual Accounting calculations. The new dual
accounting function delivered through roadmap allows for the calculation of ONRR Wet Gas equivalent costs used to
reduce the Wet Gas comparison value. The residue cost rate (by type) for NARM sales to be applied to Wet Gas to
determine Wet Gas theoretical costs is available through two options

• Calculate MCF cost rates (by type) by dividing total NARM residue costs by type by the total NARM residue
MCF (Volume basis)
• Calculate energy cost rates (by type) by dividing total NARM residue costs by type by the total NARM residue
energy (Energy basis)

The theoretical Wet Gas costs (by type) are determined by multiplying the Residue Cost Rate Time, the Wet Gas
Volume or Energy, depending on cost rate option selected.

10.1.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Valuation →
Maintain Theoretical Wet Gas cost Calc. basis for Dual Accounting

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 266
Configuration Guide

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

10.1.5 Maintain UCA Rate Types

10.1.5.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you maintain the UCA rate types to be used in the UCA rate maintenance transaction.

10.1.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Valuation →
Maintain UCA Rate Types

10.2 Configure Taxes

10.2.1 Define Severance Tax Types

10.2.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up Severance Tax Types for a particular combination of Country and Primary
Geographical Location.

Example
Country: US
Primary Location: 01
Severance Tax Type: PR
Severance Tax Desc.: PRODUCTION TAX

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 267
Configuration Guide

10.2.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Configure Taxes
→ Define Severence Tax Types

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

Figure 10.3 Severance Tax Types Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 268
Configuration Guide

10.2.2 State Tax Configuration

10.2.2.1 Use

In this activity you assign subroutines that calculate taxes for a particular combination of entities including Primary
Geographical Location, Major Product Code, Volume Type Code, Severance Tax Type, and Country.

10.2.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Configure Taxes
→ State tax configuration

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

Figure 10.4 State Tax Configuration Header Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 269
Configuration Guide

Figure 10.5 State Tax Configuration Detail Overview

10.2.3 Valuation Tax Configuration

10.2.3.1 Use

You can use this Customizing to define the configuration used to setup Valuation Tax Code.

10.2.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Configure Taxes
→ Valuation Tax Configuration

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 270
Configuration Guide

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

Figure 10.6 State Tax Configuration Classes Overview

10.2.4 Severance Tax Type Group Table

10.2.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, for each combination of Major Product Code, Country, Primary Geographical Location and
Severance Tax Type, you make the required entries for the calculation of taxable volume and value in Valuation.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 271
Configuration Guide

10.2.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Configure Taxes
→ Severance Tax Type Group Table

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

Figure 10.7 Maintenance View Overview

10.2.5 Define Tax Classes

10.2.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up a tax class for a particular combination of Country and Primary Geographical Location.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 272
Configuration Guide

Example
Country: US
Primary Location: 17
Tax Class: 16
Tax Class Desc: Incapable Oil Well

10.2.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Configure Taxes
→ Define Tax Classes

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

Figure 10.8 Tax Class - Table Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 273
Configuration Guide

10.2.6 Define School District Codes

10.2.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set up the school district codes for a particular combination of Country and Primary
Geographical Location. The system uses school district data for tax classification in certain states.

Example
School District Code: 001
Primary Geo Location: 30
Country: US
School Dist. Desc.: N. Mex School Dist. 01 - Chaves Co.

10.2.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Configure Taxes
→ Define School District Codes

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

10.2.7 Maintain Severance Tax type by State and

Interest Category

10.2.7.1 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu SPRO → Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Revenue Accounting → Configure Taxes
→ Maintain Severance Tax type by State and Interest Category

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 274
Configuration Guide

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain all the relevant fields and save.

Figure 10.9 Method Overview

10.3 Check Input

10.3.1 Maintain Product Code Price Range

10.3.1.1 Use

You can use this procedure to maintain Price Range per Product Code. If the range is maintained, the system checks
whether the calculated price is within the range.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 275
Configuration Guide

10.3.1.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose → Revenue Accounting→ Check Input→
Maintain Product Code Price Range.

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain the Full Product, Price limit from and Price limit to fields.

4. Save your entries.

10.3.2 Maintain Receivable Decimal

10.3.2.1 Use

You can use this procedure to maintain the Receivable tolerance. The system checks if the Receivable difference is
within the Receivable Tolerance Range. If you do not maintain the Receivable Tolerance, the check is skipped.

10.3.2.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue Accounting → Check Input → Maintain
Receivable Decimal.

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain the Type Id and Tolerance.

4. Save your entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 276
Configuration Guide

10.3.3 Maintain Miscellaneous Income or Deduct

Account

10.3.3.1 Use

You can use this procedure to maintain Miscellaneous Income or Deduct Account for a Company for a particular
Income or Deduct type.

10.3.3.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose → Revenue Accounting → Check Input →
Maintain Miscellaneous Income or Deduct Account.

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain the Company code, Deduction type and G/L Account.

4. Save your entries.

10.3.4 Check layout

10.3.4.1 Use

Use this procedure to establish and maintain check layouts for the input of check data. Since each Remitter uses a
different check format, the system uses a layout to map a Remitter’s data into standard Check Input fields for further
processing.

10.3.4.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting.→ Revenue
Accounting → Check Input → Master Data → Check Layout.

2. Choose Create.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 277
Configuration Guide

3. Enter the following data as required:

• In the Seq field, specify the order in which the associated field name will appear in the check layout.
• In the Field Name field, enter the names of the fields to be included in the check layout.
• In the Override Field Name field, enter a description of the field name that will be used in place of the already
existing description throughout Check Input. You could use this field to rename a field in order to match the
actual field name on the check detail.
• In the Calc Net field, specify whether the corresponding Field Name is used to calculate the net amount.
• To sum the field for all equal records in a check (that is, records with the same property number, sales from
date, remitter product code, etc.), select the Sum indicator.
• The Approved indicator must be selected before the layout can be Cross-Referenced to a Remitter in the
Remitter / Layout Cross Reference.

4. Save your entries.

10.3.5 Remitter/Layout Cross-Reference

10.3.5.1 Use

Use this procedure to assign a specific check layout to a Remitter. This assignment must be established before the
layout can be accessed in other Check Input transactions

10.3.5.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Check Input → Master Data → Remitter/Layout Cross-Reference.

2. Choose Create. The Check Input - Remitter / Layout Cross Ref screen (2) appears.

3. Enter data as required. Though the Remitter may be tied to several different layouts, only one layout may be
designated as the default.

4. To enter free-form text comments, choose Comments.

5. Save your entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 278
Configuration Guide

10.3.6 Remitter/DOI Cross-Reference

10.3.6.1 Use

Use this procedure to link Remitter property data to a Property / Division of Interest (DOI).

This Cross-Reference is used in Check Input (CI) to verify that a link has been established between a Remitter and a
DOI / Measurement Point.

This Cross Reference must be maintained before check input revenue can be processed in PRA. (The system
allocates CI revenue at the check detail line level because detail lines may specify a different Remitter property
number.)

10.3.6.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Check Input → Master Data → Remitter/DOI Cross-Reference.

2. Choose Create' The Remitter / DOI Cross Reference: Create screen appears.

3. Enter data as required. Select either the Property/DOI, Measurement Point, or Affiliated Account radio button.
Enter the corresponding ID, and then continue entering data as required

10.3.7 Remitter/Purchaser Cross-Reference

10.3.7.1 Use

You can use procedure to establish a Cross-Reference when the entity responsible for Remitting payment is
someone other than the purchaser. Because many different Remitters may exist for a single purchaser, the Remitter
information you enter is specific to a property/DOI, product, and either a Well Completion or Measurement Point.

10.3.7.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Check Input → Master Data → Remitter/Purchaser Cross-Reference.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 279
Configuration Guide

2. Enter the Joint Venture, Full Product, Effective dates, Purchaser and Remitter No.

3. Save your entries.

10.3.8 Process Rules

10.3.8.1 Use

You can use procedure to establish and maintain Processing Rules to be used if it is necessary to manipulate check
field values when a Remitter’s check is processed.

10.3.8.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Check Input → Master Data → Process Rules.

2. Enter the Remitter and Layout ID and unique process rules.

3. Save your entries.

10.3.9 Translations

10.3.9.1 Use

Use this procedure to establish and maintain translations of a Remitter’s code value for a product or property into a
recognized SAP Oil and Gas System value.

The system uses translations when Remitter check detail lines contain values that do not correlate directly to SAP
values. For example, a Remitter may identify an oil product as OIL while SAP identifies the same product as 100.

This transaction provides a method to translate Remitter values into SAP values.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 280
Configuration Guide

10.3.9.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Check Input → Master Data → Translations. The Product / Property Translations screen appears.

2. Choose Create. The Product / Property Translations screen (2) appears.

3. Enter the Remitter ID and the Layout ID. Then continue entering data.

4. Save your entries.

10.3.10 CDEX Remitter Cross-Reference

10.3.10.1 Use

You can use procedure this to maintain cross reference from CDEX remitter to PRA remitter.

10.3.10.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Check Input → Master Data → CDEX Remitter Cross-Reference.

2. Enter CDEX Company, CDEX Remitter and PRA Cash Company and PRA Remitter code.

3. Save your entries.

10.3.11 CDEX Remitter Cross-Reference

10.3.11.1 Use

You can use this procedure to maintain a Cross-Reference from a CDEX product code and a PRA product code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 281
Configuration Guide

10.3.11.2 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue
Accounting → Master Data → CDEX Company Product Cross-Reference.

2. Enter CDEX Company, CDEX Product code and Remitter Product code.

3. Save your entries.

10.4 Payment Processing

10.4.1 Enable Process

10.4.1.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you can enable Payment Processing.

10.4.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Enable Process

Figure 10.10 Payment Processing Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 282
Configuration Guide

On Payment Processing - Process Enable Config screen, make the following entries

Field name Description User action and values Note

Process ID Process ID Process ID

Enabled Enable Payment Payment Process Enable

process Flag

10.4.2 Maintain High level Configuration

10.4.2.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you can define the configuration to have check level detail at the Well or Venture level.
The default is venture level and there will be an override for the Well level.

10.4.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain High level Configuration

Figure 10.11 Payment Processing - High Level Config Details

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 283
Configuration Guide

On Payment Processing- High level Config screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Chk Dtl Level Check Level Valid values include Well / Well
Detail Completion level used to create
check detail on a Well basis or
Venture / DOI level that
summarizes check detail across
Well / Well Completions to the
Venture / DOI.

Ignore RecPayCD Ignore Record Specifies the indicator set in

Payment Code configuration which determines
Flag whether a payable selected as
Future Pay will be overridden or
not to be paid in the current
Payment Process 2.0 run.

Ign Blk CC Rej Ignore Blocked It determines whether a blocked

Cost Center cost center encountered in
Reject Payment Processing 2.0 will result
in a hard error or not.

Wh JE DOI Comp Create It allows to Create Withholding JE

Withholding JE Using DOI Company.
Using DOI
Company

10.4.3 Maintain Check Detail Level Override by Region

10.4.3.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you can define the configuration in check detail level to be Overridden by Region.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 284
Configuration Guide

10.4.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Check Detail Level Override By
Region

Figure 10.12 Payment Processing - Check Detail Level Override by Region

On Payment Processing- Check Detail Level Override by Region screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

City City City

Region Region Region

ChkDtl Lvl Check Detail Check Detail Level

Level Overridden by Region

10.4.4 Maintain Process Group

10.4.4.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to define the Process Group. Process Group represents the Paying Company. For
each Paying Company you must create a Processing Group. If you have one check write for all companies then you
will have one Process Group. If you have a check write per company you will have multiple Process Groups. The
Process Group name is free form and does not have to be the company code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 285
Configuration Guide

10.4.4.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Process Group

Figure 10.13 Payment Processing - Process Group Config Overview

On Payment Processing- Process Group Config screen, make the following entries

Field name Description User action and values Note

Process ID

ProcessGrp

Description

10.4.5 Maintain Process Group/Cash Company XRef

10.4.5.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you can associate Process group to Cash Company.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 286
Configuration Guide

10.4.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Process Group/Cash Company XRef

Figure 10.14 Payment Processing - Process Group / Cash Company XRef

On Payment Processing- Process Group/Cash Company XRef screen, make the following entries

Field name Description User action and values Note

ProcessGrp Process Group Process Group

CoCD Company code Company Code

ChkclrAcct Check Clearing The account to be used for

Account journalizing the Payment
Processing summary to clear
amounts for total checks generated
out of the Payment Process 2.0
journalization process.

NonChkClr Non-Check The account to be used for

Clearing Account journalizing the Payment
Processing summary to clear
amounts for total non-check
payments generated out of the
Payment Process 2.0 journalization
process.

JIBClrAcct JIB Clearing The account to be used for

Account journalizing the Payment
Processing summary. This clears
the amount for total checks
generated out of the Payment
Process 2.0 journalization process
for JIB owners.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 287
Configuration Guide

10.4.6 Define House Banks

10.4.6.1 Use

Each House Bank of a Company Code is represented by a Bank ID in the SAP system, every account at a House
Bank by an Account ID. In the SAP system, you use the Bank ID and the account ID to specify bank details. These
specifications are used, for example, for automatic payment transactions to determine the bank details for payment.

10.4.6.2 Standard settings

Several House Banks are supplied as examples in the standard system in order to enable configuration of the
payment program.

10.4.7 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Define House Banks

Figure 10.15 Adding New Entries

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 288
Configuration Guide

On Payment Processing- House Banks screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

House Bank

Bank Ctry

Bank Key

Bank Name

10.4.8 Define Number Ranges for Checks

10.4.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the required number intervals. The pre numbered checks are usually split into lots so
that they can be printed or filled out at different locations. A check number interval in the SAP System represents a lot
of pre numbered checks.

10.4.8.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing →Define Number Ranges for Checks

Here we have to set up the number range for checks Payment methods list should be C and Number Status should
be set to starting value of the lot.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 289
Configuration Guide

Figure 10.16 Check Lots

On Payment Processing- Number range for checks screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Payment Paying company

company code code

House Bank House Bank

Account ID Account ID

Lot No Lot No Lot Number

Check No From Check Num from When you are considering a

check number lot, this is the
lower limit of the lot.

Check No To Check num To If an interval of check numbers

is looked at, then this is the
upper limit of the interval.

Number Status Number status Last Check Number Assigned

Non- Sequence Non Sequence

Pmnt meths list Payment List of Pmnt Methods Permitted

methods list for this Check Lot

Purchase date Purchase date Purchase date

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 290
Configuration Guide

10.4.9 Maintain Payment Processing Number Ranges

10.4.9.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define number ranges for payment processing. These number ranges are
used for the EFT and Wire Payment Processing.

10.4.9.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Payment Processing Number Ranges

Figure 10.17 Maintain Payment Processing Number Ranges

On Payment Processing Number Ranges screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Status

Maintain
Number Range
Interval

Maintain
Configuration

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 291
Configuration Guide

Transport
Number Range
Interval

Long text

10.4.10 Maintain Cash Company Bank Information

10.4.10.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to attach Bank ID and Account to the cash company.

10.4.10.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Cash Company Bank Information

Figure 10.18 Payment Processing - Cash Company Bank Info

On Payment Processing- Cash Company Bank Info screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

House BK

Acc ID

CoCd

DefBnkAcct

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 292
Configuration Guide

10.4.11 Maintain Company/Process Group XRef

10.4.11.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to associate payable account and receivable account to Process group.

10.4.11.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Company/Process Group XRef

Figure 10.19 Adding New Entries

On Payment Processing- Company/Process Group XRef configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

CoCd

ProcessGrp

Payables Payables account G/L account to which payables to

Account for company code other company codes for cross-
clearing company code documents are to be
posted automatically.

Receivables Act Receivables G/L account to which receivables

account for from other company codes for
company code cross- company code documents
clearing are to be posted automatically.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 293
Configuration Guide

10.4.12 Maintain Company Minimum Pay Information

10.4.12.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to set up the minimum pay and annual pay for a particular company when the
Owner Level, Run Level and Region Level is not maintained. The AnMnPayMth field is configured as January, this
means the minimum pay decreases to $10 instead of the $100. This represents the annual pay month and annual
minimum pay.

10.4.12.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Company Minimum Pay Information

Figure 10.20 Payment Processing - Minimum Pay (Company)

On Payment Processing- Minimum Pay (Company) configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

CoCd

Monthly
Minimum Pay

Annual Minimum
Pay

AnMnPayMth

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 294
Configuration Guide

10.4.13 Maintain Tax Type Code

10.4.13.1 Use

In this customizing activity, you maintain tax type. This is used in the customizing activity:
<DS:SIMG./PRA/MAINT_TAXTY_XRF>Maintain Tax Type XRef.

10.4.13.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Tax Type Code

Figure 10.21 Revenue - Tax Types

On Payment Processing- Tax Type Code configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and Note

values

City

Region

SvTx

Description

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 295
Configuration Guide

10.4.14 Maintain Remittance Advice Codes

10.4.14.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to associate legend codes along with Tax, Deducts and Marketing. The legend
codes are free form 4 character fields (numbers and characters).

10.4.14.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Remittance Advice Codes

Figure 10.22 Payment Processing - Remittance Advice Codes

On Payment Processing- Remittance Advice Codes configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Lgn CdTyp

Legend Cd

TRANS CD

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 296
Configuration Guide

10.4.15 Maintain Marketing Type XRef

10.4.15.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to attach external marketing costs or internal marketing costs to legend codes setup
for marketing in Maintain Remittance Advice Codes.

10.4.15.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Cash Company Bank Information

Figure 10.23 Payment Processing - Marketing Type XRef

On Payment Processing- Marketing Type XRef config screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Mt

Pd

Int/Ext

Legend Cd

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 297
Configuration Guide

10.4.16 Maintain Tax Type XRef

10.4.16.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define the configuration used for mapping for legend codes for tax by state

10.4.16.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Tax Type XRef

Figure 10.24 Payment Processing - Tax Type Xref

On Payment Processing- Tax Type XRef configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

City

Region

SvTx

Pd

Legend Cd

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 298
Configuration Guide

10.4.17 Maintain Other Deduct Type XRef

10.4.17.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define the configuration for Miscellaneous Deducts and WH Taxes.

10.4.17.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing →Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Other Deduct Type XRef

Figure 10.25 Payment Processing - Other Deduct XRef

On Payment Processing- Other Deduct XRef configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

OthDd

Legend Cd

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 299
Configuration Guide

10.4.18 Maintain Unit Of Measure XRef

10.4.18.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define UoM X-Ref for legend code

10.4.18.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Unit Of Measure XRef

Figure 10.26 Payment Processing - Unit of Measure XRef

On Payment Processing- Unit Of Measure XRef configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

MU

Legend Cd

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 300
Configuration Guide

10.4.19 Maintain Reimbursement XRef

10.4.19.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define the reimbursement X-Ref.

10.4.19.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Reimbursement XRef

Figure 10.27 Payment Processing - Reimbursement XRef

On Payment Processing - Reimbursement XRef configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

TaxMktOthD

Legend Cd

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 301
Configuration Guide

10.4.20 Maintain Special Handling Codes

10.4.20.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define special handling code configuration used to attach to an owner check.
You can have multiple handling codes for an owner.

10.4.20.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Special Handling Codes

Figure 10.28 Payment Processing - Special Handling Codes

On Payment Processing- Special Handling Codes configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

SpHandleCd

Description

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 302
Configuration Guide

10.4.21 Assign Threshold Driven Special Handling

Codes

10.4.21.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to maintain destination and queue name of background RFC.

10.4.21.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Assign Threshold Driven Special Handling
Codes

Figure 10.29 Payment Processing - Threshold Driven Special Handling Codes

On Payment Processing- Threshold Driven Special Handling Codes configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Threshold Amount

Crcy

SpHandleCd

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 303
Configuration Guide

10.4.22 Maintain High Level Reject Action

10.4.22.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define the rejection action.

10.4.22.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain High Level Reject Action

Figure 10.30 Payment Processing - High Level Reject Action

On Payment Processing - High Level Reject Action configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Reject Cd

MoveToRej

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 304
Configuration Guide

10.4.23 Maintain Account/Withholding Type XRef

10.4.23.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define the configuration used to set the payable account used for booking
entries for the withholding type.

10.4.23.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Maintain Account/Withholding Type XRef

Figure 10.31 Payment Processing - Account / Withholding Type XRef

On Payment Processing- Account/Withholding Type XRef configuration sreen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

CoCd

WH Type

G/L Account

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 305
Configuration Guide

10.5 Enhancements

10.5.1 Maintain Package Size for Process Steps

10.5.1.1 Use

You use this customizing activity to define package size to limit the data from standard SQL queries in the journalized
process step of Payment Processing.

10.5.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration→ Payment Processing → Enhancements → Maintain Package Size for
Process Steps

Figure 10.32 Maintenance View to Configure Package Fetch Size

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 306
Configuration Guide

On Payment Processing - Package Size for Process Steps configuration screen, make the following entries:

Figure 10.33 Adding New Entries

Field name Description User action and values Note

Process ID

Process Step

Number

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 307
Configuration Guide

10.5.2 Maintain With holding Type Codes

10.5.2.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define withholding type codes.

10.5.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Enhancements → Maintain Withholding Type
Codes

Figure 10.34 Payment Processing - Withholding Type Codes

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 308
Configuration Guide

On Payment Processing- Withholding Type Codes configuration screen, make the following entries:

Figure 10.35 Payment Processing - Withholding Type Codes

Field name Description User action and values Note

WH Type

Description

Cty

Region

Ctry

Class Name

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 309
Configuration Guide

10.5.3 Maintain Custom High Level Reject Codes

10.5.3.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define the high level rejection codes.

10.5.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Enhancements → Maintain Custom High Level
Reject Codes

Figure 10.36 Payment Processing - High Level Reject Codes

On Payment Processing- High Level Reject Codes configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Reject Cd

Description

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 310
Configuration Guide

10.5.4 Maintain Custom High Level Reject Action.

10.5.4.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define the high level rejection action.

10.5.4.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Enhancements → Maintain Custom High Level
Reject Action

Figure 10.37 Payment Processing - Custom High Level Reject Action

On Payment Processing- Custom High Level Reject Action configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Reject Cd

Move ToRej

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 311
Configuration Guide

10.5.5 Maintain Custom Detail Level Reject Codes

10.5.5.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to define detail level rejection codes.

10.5.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Payment Processing → Enhancements → Maintain Custom Detail
Level Reject Codes

Figure 10.38 Payment Processing - Detail Level Reject Codes

On Payment Processing - Detail Level Reject Codes configuration screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Dtl Rej Cd

Description

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 312
Configuration Guide

10.6 Accounting Document

10.6.1 Configure Accounting Category

10.6.1.1 Use

You can use this procedure to link an account category to an account type. Revenue Distribution uses the
accounting category to assign every line item to a General Ledger account, while the account type code identifies the
account name as well as the type of ledger, such as Accounts Payable or Accounts Receivable, to which a line item
is assigned.

After you enter an accounting category and an account type and then choose Create, the system displays the
corresponding Category Attributes indicators.

When you select an indicator, then the corresponding field in the Account Entry Control transaction requires an entry.
(Exception: Completing the Affiliated Company field in the Account Entry Control transaction is optional.)

10.6.1.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue Accounting → Accounting Document →
Configure Accounting Category.

2. On Defining Number Range Interval screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Account Account categories represent Royalties Payable, Legal Suspense Account category code
Category groupings of individual
account IDs in Journal Entry.

Account The account type which, in JE Owner Payable, Legal Suspense Account Type
Type posting, determines the
subledger that the transaction
for that subject account will be
posted to.

State Specifies if the attribute is to State Flag

be mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an accounting
category.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 313
Configuration Guide

Field name Description User action and values Note

Entity Type Specifies if the attribute is to Entity Type Flag

be mandatorily used on the
Accounting Entry Control
screen to assign unique
account numbers to an
account category.

Product Specifies if the attribute is to Product Flag

be mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an accounting
category.

Interest Specifies if the attribute Interest Type Flag

Type (interest type) is to be
mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an accounting
category.

Cont Type Specifies if the attribute Contract Type

(Contract Type) is to be
mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an accounting
category.

Vol Type Specifies if the attribute is to Volume Type

be mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an accounting
category.

Sev Tax Specifies if the attribute Severance Tax Type

Typ (severance tax type) is to be
mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an accounting
category.

Mrkt.cost Specifies if the attribute Marketing Cost Type

(marketing type) is to be
mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an account

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 314
Configuration Guide

Field name Description User action and values Note

category.

Prop. Int Specifies if the attribute Property Interest

(property interest) is to be
mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an accounting
category.

Affil Co Specifies if the attribute Affiliated Company

(affiliated company) is to be
mandatorily used on the
Account Entry Control screen
to assign unique account
numbers to an account
category.

3. Choose Save.

10.6.2 Configure Accounting Rules

10.6.2.1 Use

You can use this procedure to specify how the system posts records into SAP Financials (the SAP FI Module). You
customize how the system summarizes data, and how the system posts line items.

The ultimate destination of financial transaction entries in the system is the SAP FI Module. SAP FI is not part of
PRA, but is part of Core ERP. Accounting Document entries are stored both in Accounting Document line item tables
and in SAP FI.

Listed below are the main areas available in the activity for customizing Accounting Document accounting rules. An
explanation of each follows. The fields show up in various tables in Accounting Document, but you can access them
from the IMG activity. To add new entries, you select Change/Display and then New Entries.

Destination codes
Use the Destination Codes table to specify which posting keys are to be used for Production and Revenue
Accounting (PRA) transactions subsequently posted to SAP FI. Posting keys are two-digit keys (numbers) that
identify how specific entries are to be posted.

The destination code is tied to an account type, which identifies the type of Accounting Document table (line item
table), such as Accounts Payable (AP) or Accounts Receivable (AR).

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 315
Configuration Guide

The destination code represents how data is processed in SAP FI. For example, a destination code could be
configured with posting key 40, which represents a debit to a general ledger account in SAP Financials.

Destination Code/BI
Use the Destination Code/BI table to specify billing indicators and special general ledger indicators to be used for
customer and vendor transactions.

In PRA, the billing indicator (BI) classifies whether a posting is a carried interest posting or a net profit interest posting
for customers and vendors. The special G/L indicator determines which alternative reconciliation account is used for
posting line items to customer or vendor accounts.

Account Type Rules

Use the Account Type Rules table to specify data for Accounting Document to use when processing transactions for
a line item table. The rules control how postings are made. In this area, you are in effect customizing how to create a
document in FI. There are two ways to do that: by account type - which is at a high level, and by account ID - which is
a specific account. The document type is configurable in FI, and you can set up rules for it here. SAP recommends
that you use one document type for PRA for everything. This should follow the rule: one batch = one document.

Note:
To access the Account Type Rules: Detail screen in order to specify data, double click the account type on
the Account Type Rules: Overview screen.

Account ID Rules
Use the Account ID Rules table to specify data for Accounting Document to use when processing transactions for an
Accounting Document line item table.

The rules in this table are more specific than the rules in the Account Type Rules table. The system first processes
transactions with any rules listed in this table, and subsequently processes transactions with any rules listed in the
Account Type Rules table.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 316
Configuration Guide

10.6.2.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue→ Accounting Document → Configure
Accounting rules

2. On Destination code screen, make the following entries:

Destination Code

Field name Description User action and values Note

Dest.Cd The destination code Account Receivable, Destination code

defines where specifically Account Payable,
an entry is to go in the General Ledger
system (to what table). For
example, the entry might
go straight into FI (the
usual situation), or it might
go to JVA (Joint Venture
Accounting) in special
situations

Debit Pk The posting key (PK) is a 21,01,40 Debit Post.key

two-digit number that
identifies where a specific
type of entry is to be posted
in the system (to which
table it is to be posted).
Here, it is a on the debit
side.

Credit Pk The posting key (PK) is a 31,11,50 Credit Posting key

two-digit number that
identifies where a specific
type of entry is to be posted
in the system (to which
table it is to be posted).
Here, it is a posting key on
the credit side.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 317
Configuration Guide

Destination Code/BI

Field name Description User action and values Note

Dest. Cd The destination code Destination code

defines where specifically
an entry is to go in the
system (to what table). For
example, the entry might
go straight into FI (the
usual situation), or it might
go to JVA (Joint Venture
Accounting) in special
situations

Major PD Identifies the product by Major Product Code

product type, such as oil or
natural gas.

Bill. Ind The billing indicator is used Payroll Type

to classify postings for
customers and vendors for
Joint Venture accounting.

Sp.G/L Indicator which identifies a Special G/L indicator

special G/L transaction.

Account Type Rules

Field name Description User action and values Note

CoCode The company code is an EP01 Company Code

organizational unit within
financial accounting.

Acct Typ The account type is a high- Account Payable Account Type for Posting
level definition of how to Rules
create a document in FI for
JE. By assigning an
account type, you are
defining document creation
in FI at a higher level (than
by account ID, which is a
more detailed level). The
account type corresponds
to the JE line item table.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 318
Configuration Guide

Account ID Rules

Field name Description User action and values Note

Company Code The company code is an Company Code

organizational unit within
financial accounting.

G/L Account The G/L account number G/L Account Number

identifies the G/L account
in a chart of accounts.

Account Type The account type is a high- Account Type for Posting
level definition of how to Rules
create a document in FI for
JE. By assigning an
account type, you are
defining document creation
in FI at a higher level (than
by account ID, which is a
more detailed level).

Document Type The document type Document Type

classifies the accounting
documents. It is stored in
the document header.

Text Contains an explanatory Item Text

text on the line item.

Recovery Indic. In global companies that Recovery Indicator

belong to joint ventures,
incurred costs are usually
shared among different
recovery indicators which
can then be dealt with in
different ways using the
periodic settlement
program.

Destination Cd. The destination code Destination Code

defines where specifically
an entry is to go in the
system (to what table). For
example, the entry might
go straight into FI (the
usual situation), or it might
go to JVA (Joint Venture
Accounting) in special
situations.

Acc. Category. Account Category for

Posting rules

Summarize Integration will try to Summarize by

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 319
Configuration Guide

summarize things down to

an account document date,
material, record level.

Customer Type Customer Type for JE

Prod.date type Production date Type

Cost Ctr Type A rule that says - If you do Cost Centre Type for JE
not have a cost center on
the transaction, do you
want to default one in.

Alloc. Type Allocation Type for JE

3. Choose Save.

10.6.3 Define Accounting Cycle Control

10.6.3.1 Use

You can use this procedure to define accounting cycle control.

The Accounting Cycle Control table must be initialized with the current account period and two future accounting
periods for each PRA company. The Accounting Entry component will create a new future accounting period when
the current accounting period has been closed.

10.6.3.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue → Accounting Document → Define
Accounting Cycle Control.

2. On PRA Company accounting period screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

CoCd The company code is an EP01 Company Code

organizational unit within
financial accounting.

Acct. Per Specifies the accounting 08.2011 Accounting period

month and year or fiscal
period for which figures are

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 320
Configuration Guide

updated or posted. User

settings determine the format
display, that is, MM/YYYY or
MM.YYYY

Month Close A Y in this field indicates that Yes Month Close

the account month has been
closed.
A N in this field indicates that
the account month has not
been closed.

Current Month Indicates that a particular row No Current Month

is current month (enter Y) or
not (enter N). Only one per
company is allowed.

Last Month Indicates that a particular row No Last Month Close

Closed is the last month close (enter
Y). Only one row
representing the last month
closed is allowed per
company. If a row is not the
last month close, enter N.

Created By Name of Person who Created the

Object

Short Time The UTC time stamp is the 0 UTC Time Stamp in Short Form
Stamp date and time relative to UTC (YYYYMMDDhhmmss)
(Universal Coordinated
Time).

3. Choose Save.

10.6.4 Maintain Exception for Post Block

10.6.4.1 Use

You can use this procedure to maintain exceptions during posting lock period. The exceptions is maintained at a
company level and allow certain users or modules to post a document even when Revenue Accounting Document is
locked for posting.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 321
Configuration Guide

10.6.4.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue → Accounting Document → Maintain
Exception for post Block.

2. On screen, make the following entries:

Field name Description User action and values Note

Excep Id Specifies the ID associated 1 Exception Id for RAD Post lock

with the exception provided to
certain users when blocking a
company from posting. You
maintain this information in
Customizing for Maintain
Exceptions for Post Block.

Exception Describes the exception ID Testing Exception Id for RAD Post lock
Description

Exception Unlocking

Field name Description User action and values Note

Doc Type Classifies the accounting 11 Document Type

documents. It is stored in the
document header.

User name Logon name of the user Hari Krishnak User name

Application Application Revenue Document Type Application

Source

3. Choose Save.

10.7 Account Receivable

10.7.1 Configure Accounts Receivable Balance

Categories

10.7.1.1 Use

You can use this procedure to create an Account Receivable Balance Category.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 322
Configuration Guide

10.7.1.2 Procedure

In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue Accounting → Account Receivable →
Configure Receivable Balance Categories. Click New Entries to maintain the AR Balance Categories.

Example of AR Account Categories

AR Balance Categories Description

001 ACCOUNTING ADJUSTMENT

002 CURRENT

10.7.2 Configure Account Receivable Queue

10.7.2.1 Use

You can use this procedure to maintain the Destination and Queue information for Account Receivable.

10.7.2.2 Prerequisites

You have necessary Background RFC destination and Queue name defined in SBGRFCCONF transaction

10.7.2.3 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue Accounting → Account Receivable →
Configure Account Receivable.

2. Maintain Destination and Queue information

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 323
Configuration Guide

10.7.3 Maintain A/R Write-off Configuration

10.7.3.1 Use

You can use this procedure to configure Automatic Write-off of Accounts Receivable balance. The system write off
the Account Receivable balances when it meet the configuration during the Automatic Write-off Process.

10.7.3.2 Prerequisite

You have maintained the necessary accounts in the Chat of Account transactions.

10.7.3.3 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access Screen, choose Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue Accounting →
Account Receivable → Real Time A/R Reconciliation → Maintain A/R Write-Off Configuration.

2. Maintain a Write-Off for G/L Account with:

• Percentage of Amount
• Company Code
• Account ID
• AR Write-off Age
• AR Write-off Amount
• AR Write-off Percent

Example

Company G/L Account AR Age Percentage AR Write-Off AR Write-Off

Code Indicator Amount Percentage

Ex: EP01 XXXXXX XXX ‘X’ ‘ ’ Ex: 100,00 Ex: 1,00

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 324
Configuration Guide

10.8 Taxes Payable

10.8.1 Configure Taxes Payable Queue

10.8.1.1 Use

You can use this procedure to maintain the Destination and Queue information for Taxes Payable.

10.8.1.2 Prerequisites

You have necessary Background RFC destination and Queue name defined in SBGRFCCONF transaction

10.8.1.3 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue Accounting → Choose Taxes Payable
Reconciliation → Configure Taxes Payable.

2. Maintain Destination and Queue information.

10.8.2 Maintain Taxes Payable Balance Categories

10.8.2.1 Use

Use this activity to define Taxes Payable Balance categories.

10.8.2.2 Procedure

1. In Customizing for Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA), choose Revenue Accounting → Choose Taxes Payable
Reconciliation → Maintain Taxes Payable Balance Categories.

2. Maintain TP Balance category and appropriate description for it.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 325
Configuration Guide

Taxes Payable Balance Category Description

001 Master data incorrect

002 Invalid date

003 Incorrect PPN

10.8.3 Taxes Payable Write-off Setup

10.8.3.1 Use

You can use this procedure to configure Automatic Write-off of Taxes Payable balance. The system write off the
Taxes Payable balances when it meet the configuration during the Automatic Write-off Process.

10.8.3.2 Prerequisites

You have maintained the necessary accounts in the Chat of Account transactions.

10.8.3.3 Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access Screen, choose Production and Revenue Accounting → Revenue Accounting →
Taxes Payable → Taxes Payable Write-Off Setup.

2. Maintain a Write-Off for G/L Account with

• Percentage of Amount
• Company Code
• Account ID
• TP Write-off Age
• TP Write-off Amount
• TP Write-off Percent

Example

Company G/L Account TP Age Percentage TP Write-Off TP Write-Off

Code Indicator Amount Percentage

Ex: EP01 XXXXXX XXX ‘X’ ‘ ’ Ex: 100,00 Ex: 1,00

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 326
Configuration Guide

11 Tax and Royalty Reporting

11.1 Maintain Common Number Ranges

11.1.1 Use

Maintaining Number Ranges.

11.1.2 Activities

Use this activity to Maintain Number Ranges for different Objects and Logical tables for the Change document.

11.1.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → General Configuration →
Maintain Common Number Ranges

Refer to [Number Range Configuration] documentation for steps.

2. You can maintain it at Object level and at Different Logical table’s level.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 327
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.1 Maintain Common Number Ranges

Figure 11.2 Number Range Interval Assignments to PRA Tables

3. Save and exit.

11.2 Tax

Report Specific Configuration

11.2.1 Texas

11.2.1.1 Enable Report

11.2.1.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you enable the required processes. Process ID refers to the report ID in the Tax framework.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 328
Configuration Guide

11.2.1.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Enable Report

2. To activate the Process ID for Report, set Enabled Indicator.

Figure 11.3 Tax 2.0 TX - Process Enable Config Overview

3. Click Save.

11.2.1.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.1.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the month during which the first report is to be generated.

11.2.1.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain First Reporting Month

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 329
Configuration Guide

2. You can assign the First Reporting Month for the Reporting Company.

Figure 11.4 Tax 2.0 TX - First Reporting Month Overview

3. Click Save.

11.2.1.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.1.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can set the level of reporting for a Reporting Company which is a Collection of SAP
Production and Revenue Accounting Companies. One of the companies within the SAP Production and Revenue
Accounting companies, acts as a cash company whose book is used for accounting.

11.2.1.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Reporting Companies

2. You assign cash company for the Reporting Company.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 330
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.5 Tax 2.0 TX - Reporting Companies

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.1.4 Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

11.2.1.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the SAP Production and Revenue Accounting companies that have to be grouped
under a Reporting Company.

11.2.1.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

2. You create and assign Process ID, Reporting Company and Company Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 331
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.6 Tax 2.0 TX - Reporting Company

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.1.5 Maintain Texas Number Ranges

11.2.1.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, assign the Number Ranges for Out of Statue Write off Number, Auto Suspend Criteria Number,
Limitation Criteria Number, and Statute of Limitation Exception Number.

11.2.1.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Texas Number Ranges

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 332
Configuration Guide

11.2.1.6 Maintain Commodity Cross-Reference

11.2.1.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you link the Internal Product Codes to the appropriate codes to be reported to the State.

Example
Internal Product Code AAA can be linked to Oil, which is an external Product Code.

11.2.1.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Commodity Cross-Reference

2. You assign and maintain the commodity type for the full product code

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 333
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.7 Tax Reporting - Texas Commodity

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 334
Configuration Guide

11.2.1.7 Maintain Tax Class/Exemption Type Cross

Reference

11.2.1.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you specify the Tax Class for wells that are eligible for lower or incentive tax
Rates. Tax rates are assigned to the Tax Classes. If no Tax Class is assigned to a well, the standard
Tax rate code applies.

11.2.1.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Tax Class/Exemption Type Cross-Reference

2. You assign and maintain the Exempt type for the Report Group and Tax Class.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 335
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.8 Tax Reporting - Texas Tax Class Exemption Type XRef

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 336
Configuration Guide

11.2.1.8 Overwrite Description of Standard Rejection

Codes

11.2.1.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can modify the description of Rejection Code.

11.2.1.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Overwrite Description of Standard Rejection Codes

2. You assign and maintain the Rejection codes for Tax Reporting and its Description.

Figure 11.9 Tax Reporting - Texas Rejection Codes Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 337
Configuration Guide

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.1.9 Maintain Custom Rejection Codes

11.2.1.9.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the Customized Reject Codes that have been created through a BAdI.

11.2.1.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Custom Rejection Codes

2. For specific customers you can assign and maintain the Rejection Code and description in Tax Reporting.

Figure 11.10 Tax Reporting - Texas Rejection Codes

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 338
Configuration Guide

11.2.1.10 Maintain Report Specific Dated

Configuration

11.2.1.10.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you assign and configure the Specific Dated Report Configuration for Specific Report IDs.

11.2.1.10.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Report Specific Dated Configuration

2. You assign and maintain the Configuration date for specific Report ID.

Figure 11.11 Determine Work Area: Entry

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 339
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.12 Tax Reporting - Report Specific Dated Config. Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.1.11 Enhancement - Maintain Report / Reporting

Company / Product Code XRef

11.2.1.11.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the products that would be part of the report for a Reporting Company. This also
supports you to create separate reports for each product.

11.2.1.11.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Enhancement → Maintain Report/Reporting Company/Product Code XRef

2. You can assign and maintain the Reporting Company and Product Code for Report IDs.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 340
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.12 Tax 2.0 TX - Process / Reporting Company / Prod Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 341
Configuration Guide

11.2.2 Oklahoma

11.2.2.1 Enable Report

11.2.2.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Enable Report

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for remaining steps.

11.2.2.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.2.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain First Reporting Month

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for remaining steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 342
Configuration Guide

11.2.2.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.2.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Reporting Companies

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for remaining steps.

11.2.2.4 Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

11.2.2.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for remaining steps.

11.2.2.5 Maintain Oklahoma Number Ranges

11.2.2.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Oklahoma Number Ranges

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 343
Configuration Guide

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

11.2.2.6 Maintain Product Code XRef

11.2.2.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you link the internal product codes to the appropriate codes to be reported to the State.

11.2.2.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Product Code XRef.

2. You assign the Report Group, Full Product Code and Corresponding category of product in Product Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 344
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.13 Tax 2.0 - Oklahoma Product Code Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 345
Configuration Guide

11.2.2.7 Maintain Exempt Code Cross-Reference

11.2.2.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the Entity Codes that have to be used to exempt entity types within a State and Tax
Type from Tax Reporting.

11.2.2.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Exempt Code Cross-Reference.

2. You assign Exempt Code for the Reporting Group.

Figure 11.14 Tax 2.0 - Oklahoma Exempt Code Xref

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 346
Configuration Guide

11.2.2.8 Overwrite Description of Standard Rejection

Codes

11.2.2.8.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Overwrite Description of Standard Rejection Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.8 for remaining steps.

11.2.2.9 Maintain Custom Rejection Codes

11.2.2.9.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Custom Rejection Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.9 for remaining steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 347
Configuration Guide

11.2.2.10 Maintain Report Specific Configuration

11.2.2.10.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Report Specific Dated Configuration

Refer to 11.2.1.10 for remaining steps.

11.2.2.11 Maintain Exempt Decimal Configuration

11.2.2.11.1 Use

In this IMG activity, to enable or disable the Exempt Decimal Configuration.

11.2.2.11.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Maintain Exempt Decimal Configuration

2. You check the Read Exempt Decimal, to maintain the Exemption in Decimal.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 348
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.15 Tax 2.0 - Oklahoma Exempt Decimal Configuration

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.2.12 Enhancement - Maintain Report / Report

Company / Product Code Xref

11.2.2.12.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Oklahoma → Enhancement → Maintain Report/Reporting Company/Product Code XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for remaining steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 349
Configuration Guide

11.2.3 Wyoming

11.2.3.1 Enable Report

11.2.3.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Enable Report

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for steps.

11.2.3.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.3.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain First Month Reporting Month

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 350
Configuration Guide

11.2.3.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.3.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Reporting Companies

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for steps.

11.2.3.4 Maintain Reporting Company/ Company XRef

11.2.3.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 351
Configuration Guide

11.2.3.5 Maintain Wyoming Number Ranges

11.2.3.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Wyoming Number Ranges

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

11.2.3.6 Maintain Tax Class Rate Code Cross Reference

11.2.3.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you specify the Tax Class for Wells that are eligible for lower or incentive Tax Rates. Tax Rates
are assigned to the Tax Classes. If no Tax Class is assigned to a well, the standard Tax Rate Code applies.

11.2.3.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Tax Class Rate Code Cross Reference

2. You assign and maintain the Tax Class for the specific Rate Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 352
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.16 Tax 2.0 - Wyoming Tax Class Rate Code XRef Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.3.7 Maintain Tax Oil/Gas Indicator Cross Reference

11.2.3.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the indication of Full Product Code whether its ‘Gas’ or ‘Oil’.

11.2.3.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Tax Oil/Gas Indicator Cross Reference

2. You assign and maintain the indication of Full Product Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 353
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.17 Tax 2.0 - Wyoming Tax Oil/Gas Indicator Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 354
Configuration Guide

11.2.3.8 Maintain Wyoming Conservation Report &

FORM2 Comparison Configuration

11.2.3.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, Wyoming Form 2 reports volumes of Oil or Gas produced by Wells, for Wells producing in the
state of Wyoming. The Wyoming Form 2 is the “Operator’s Monthly Report of Wells”. The report reports on:
• Volumes produced and sold
• Volumes injected into wells

Report results can be submitted using the smart forms. The report is submitted to the Wyoming Oil & Gas
Conservation Commission (WOGC).

11.2.3.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Wyoming Conservation Report & FORM2 Comparison
Configuration

2. You select the Enabled check box for activating and configuring the Conservation Report and Form2.

Figure 11.18 Tax 2.0 - Wyoming Conservation FORM 2

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 355
Configuration Guide

11.2.3.9 Overwrite Description of Standard Rejection

Codes

11.2.3.9.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Overwrite Description of Standard Rejection Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.8 for steps.

11.2.3.10 Maintain Custom Rejection Codes

11.2.3.10.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Custom Rejection Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.9 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 356
Configuration Guide

11.2.3.11 Enhancement - Maintain Report/Reporting

Company/Product Code Xref

11.2.3.11.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Enhancement → Maintain Report / Reporting Company / Product Code
XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for steps.

11.2.4 New Mexico

11.2.4.1 Enable Report

11.2.4.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Enable Report

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 357
Configuration Guide

11.2.4.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.4.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain First Reporting Month

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for Steps.

11.2.4.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.4.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Reporting Companies

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 358
Configuration Guide

11.2.4.4 Maintain Reporting Company/ Company XRef

11.2.4.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for steps.

11.2.4.5 Maintain New Mexico Number Ranges

11.2.4.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain New Mexico Number Ranges

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 359
Configuration Guide

11.2.4.6 Maintain New Mexico Product Code XRef

11.2.4.6.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain New Mexico Product Code Xref

Refer to 11.2.1.6 for steps.

11.2.4.7 Maintain Marketing Code XRef

11.2.4.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain marketing business attributes like Marketing Type for the product is assigned to
Marketing Code.

11.2.4.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Marketing Cost XRef

2. You assign the Marketing Cost Code and Marketing Type for the product produced.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 360
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.19 Tax 2.0 - NM - Marketing Type Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 361
Configuration Guide

11.2.4.8 Maintain Special Tax Rate XRef

11.2.4.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the Special Rates Code for some Tax Class.

11.2.4.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Special Tax Rate XRef

2. You assign the Special Rate Code for specific Tax Class.

Figure 11.20 Tax 2.0 - NM - Special Tax Rate Xref

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 362
Configuration Guide

11.2.4.9 Maintain New Mexico Jicarilla Credit Rate

11.2.4.9.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the Jicarilla Credit Tax Rate value.

11.2.4.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain New Mexico Jicarilla Credit Rate

2. Choose New Entries and enter the start date, End date and Val Tax Rate to maintain Jicarilla Credit Rate.

Figure 11.21 Tax 2.0 - NM - Jicarilla Credit Rate

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 363
Configuration Guide

11.2.4.10 Maintain Standard Rejection Code

Description

11.2.4.10.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Standard Rejection Code Description

Refer to 11.2.1.8 for steps.

11.2.4.11 Maintain Custom Reject Codes

11.2.4.11.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Custom Reject Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.9 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 364
Configuration Guide

11.2.4.12 Maintain Report Specific Configuration

11.2.4.12.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Report Specific Configuration

Refer to 11.2.1.10 for steps.

11.2.4.13 Enhancement - Maintain Report/Reporting

Companies/Product Code XRef

11.2.4.13.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
New Mexico → Maintain Report / Reporting Company / Product Code Xref

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 365
Configuration Guide

11.2.5 Colorado

Colorado Conservation

11.2.5.1 Enable Report

11.2.5.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Enable Report

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for steps.

11.2.5.2 Maintain First Reporting Period

11.2.5.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain First Reporting Period

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 366
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.5.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Reporting Companies

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for steps.

11.2.5.4 Maintain Reporting Company / Company Xref

11.2.5.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 367
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.5 Maintain Colorado Tax Number Ranges

11.2.5.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Colorado Tax Number Ranges

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

11.2.5.6 Maintain Product Code XRef

11.2.5.6.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Product Code Xref

Refer to 11.2.4.7 for steps.

11.2.5.7 Maintain Entity Code to Exempt Type Ref

11.2.5.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define the Entity Codes that have to be used to exempt Entity Types within a State and Tax
Type from Tax Reporting.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 368
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Entity Code to Exempt Type XRef

2. Choose New Entries and specify the Entity Type for the code assigned by Colorado Office of Conservation to
identify the Exempt Interest.

Figure 11.22 Tax 2.0 CO - Conservation Entity Code to Exempt Type Xref

3. Click Save and Exit.

11.2.5.8 Maintain Reject Codes

11.2.5.8.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Reject Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.8 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 369
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.9 Maintain Custom Reject Codes

11.2.5.9.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Maintain Custom Reject Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.9 for steps.

11.2.5.10 Enhancement - Maintain Report/Report

Company/Product Code XRef

11.2.5.10.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Enhancement → Maintain Report / Report
Company / Product Code XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 370
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.11 Colorado Severance - Enable Report

11.2.5.11.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Enable Report

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for steps.

11.2.5.12 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.5.12.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain First Reporting
Month

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 371
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.13 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.5.13.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Reporting
Company

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for steps.

11.2.5.14 Maintain Reporting Company/ Company

XRef

11.2.5.14.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Reporting
Company / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 372
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.15 Maintain Colorado Tax Number Ranges

11.2.5.15.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Colorado Tax
Number Ranges

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

11.2.5.16 Maintain Marketing Type XRef

11.2.5.16.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain and specifies the Marketing Cost from SAP Production and Revenue Accounting
Valuation (1-10) for both Oil and Gas that are mapped to Colorado Marketing Costs and Marketing Type in the
configuration.

11.2.5.16.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Marketing Type
XRef

2. Choose New Entries and specify the Marketing Cost and Marketing Type for Oil/Gas Product.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 373
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.23 Marketing Cost Cross Reference Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 374
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.17 Maintain Oil and Gas Indicator XRef

11.2.5.17.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Oil and Gas
Indicator XRef

Refer to 11.2.4.7 for steps.

11.2.5.18 Maintain Income Accounts

11.2.5.18.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can maintain the list of Income Accounts from Journal Entry to be used for loading the
Colorado severance report. If no entries are maintained, no report will be generated.

11.2.5.18.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Income
Accounts

2. Choose New Entries, and assign the Company Code and General Ledger Account Number for the company.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 375
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.24 Tax 2.0 CO - Severance Income Account Configuration Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.5.19 Maintain Reject Codes

11.2.5.19.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Reject Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.8 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 376
Configuration Guide

11.2.5.20 Maintain Custom Reject Codes

11.2.5.20.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Maintain Custom Reject
Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.9 for steps.

11.2.5.21 Enhancement - Maintain Report/Reporting

Company / Product Code XRef

11.2.5.21.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Colorado → Colorado Conservation → Colorado Severance → Enhancement →
Maintain Report / Reporting Company / Product Code XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 377
Configuration Guide

11.2.6 Louisiana

11.2.6.1 Enable Reports

11.2.6.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Enable Reports

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for steps.

11.2.6.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.6.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain First Reporting Month

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 378
Configuration Guide

11.2.6.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.6.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Reporting Companies

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for steps.

11.2.6.4 Maintain Reporting Companies / Company XRef

11.2.6.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Reporting Companies / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for steps.

11.2.6.5 Maintain Louisiana Tax Number Ranges

11.2.6.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Louisiana Tax Number Ranges

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 379
Configuration Guide

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

11.2.6.6 Maintain Product Code / Kind Code XRef

11.2.6.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you link Product Code, which is SAP Production and Revenue Accounting specific, with kind
code, which is specific to the State of Louisiana.

11.2.6.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Product Code / Kind Code XRef

2. Choose New Entries, and assign Kind Code for the corresponding Product Code.

Figure 11.25 Tax 2.0 LA - Product Code / Kind Code XRef Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 380
Configuration Guide

11.2.6.7 Maintain Volume Type / Exclusion Code

Reference

11.2.6.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you link the Volume Type, which has to be excluded during tax calculation, to an Exclusion Code.
However, the Volume Type will be reported.

11.2.6.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Volume Type / Exclusion Code Reference

2. Choose New Entries, and assign and link the Volume Type with an Exclusion Code.

Figure 11.26 Tax 2.0 LA - Volume Type Code / Exclusion Code XRef Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 381
Configuration Guide

11.2.6.8 Maintain Tax Rate Codes

11.2.6.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you specify who is responsible for paying the tax for a Process ID.

11.2.6.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Tax Rate Codes

2. Choose New Entries and specify the code assigned by the Louisiana Department of Revenue to designate tax
rate of resource being reported to report ID. You can include Horizontal deep well and its exemption of tax for
well.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 382
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.27 Tax 2.0 LA - Tax Rates Codes Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.6.9 Maintain Tax Class / Tax Rate Code XRef

11.2.6.9.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you specify the Tax Class for wells that are eligible for lower or incentive Tax Rates. Tax Rates
are assigned to the Tax Classes. If no Tax Class is assigned to a well, the standard Tax Rate code applies.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 383
Configuration Guide

11.2.6.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Tax Class / Tax Rate Code XRef

2. Choose New Entries, and assign the Tax Class and Tax Rate Code for the Report ID.

Figure 11.28 Tax 2.0 LA - Tax Rate Code XRef Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.6.10 Maintain Standard Reject Code Description

11.2.6.10.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Standard Reject Code Description

Refer to 11.2.1.8 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 384
Configuration Guide

11.2.6.11 Maintain Custom Reject Codes

11.2.6.11.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Maintain Custom Reject Codes

Refer to 11.2.1.9 for steps.

11.2.6.12 Enhancement - Maintain Fields

11.2.6.12.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you specify all the fields available for reporting in Louisiana along with their description.

11.2.6.12.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Enhancement → Maintain Fields

2. Choose New Entry, and specify the field and its description.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 385
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.29 Tax 2.0 LA - Fields Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.6.13 Maintain Plants

11.2.6.13.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you specify all the plants available for reporting in Louisiana.

11.2.6.13.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Enhancement → Maintain Plants

2. Choose New Entries, and specify the Plant Name and its description.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 386
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.30 Tax 2.0 LA - Plants Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.6.14 Maintain Report / Reporting Company /

Product Code XRef

11.2.6.14.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Louisiana → Enhancement → Maintain Report / Reporting Company / Product Code
Xref

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 387
Configuration Guide

11.2.7 Kansas

11.2.7.1 Enable Report

11.2.7.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Enable Report

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for steps.

11.2.7.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.7.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Maintain First Reporting Month

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 388
Configuration Guide

11.2.7.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.7.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Maintain Reporting Companies

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for steps.

11.2.7.4 Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

11.2.7.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for steps.

11.2.7.5 Maintain Kansas Number Ranges

11.2.7.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Maintain Kansas Number Ranges

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 389
Configuration Guide

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

11.2.7.6 Maintain Custom Rejection Code

11.2.7.6.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Maintain Kansas Number Range Maintain Custom Rejection Code s

Refer to 11.2.1.9 for steps.

11.2.7.7 Maintain Report / Reporting Company / Product

Code XRef

11.2.7.7.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
Kansas → Enhancements → Maintain Report / Reporting Company / Product Code Xref

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 390
Configuration Guide

11.2.8 North Dakota

11.2.8.1 Enable Report

11.2.8.1.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Enable Report

Refer to 11.2.1.1 for steps.

11.2.8.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.2.8.2.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain First Reporting Month

Refer to 11.2.1.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 391
Configuration Guide

11.2.8.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.2.8.3.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Reporting Companies

Refer to 11.2.1.3 for steps.

11.2.8.4 Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

11.2.8.4.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Reporting Company / Company XRef

Refer to 11.2.1.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 392
Configuration Guide

11.2.8.5 Maintain North Dakota Number Ranges

11.2.8.5.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain North Dakota Number Ranges

Refer to [Number Range Document] for steps.

11.2.8.6 Maintain Well Codes

11.2.8.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you set the North Dakota well codes and provide a suitable description for each well code.

11.2.8.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Well Codes

2. Choose New Entries, and assign the Well Codes and description for Well Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 393
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.31 Tax Reporting - North Dakota Exemption Type

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.8.7 Maintain Tax Class / Well Code Cross-Reference

11.2.8.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the Tax Class Cross-Reference between Tax Class and North Dakota Well Codes.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 394
Configuration Guide

11.2.8.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation option.

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Tax Class / Well Code Cross Reference

2. Choose New Entries, and assign Tax Class Reference to Well Code.

Figure 11.32 Tax 2.0 - ND Tax Class Well Code XRef Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

11.2.8.8 Maintain Pool Codes

11.2.8.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define North Dakota Pool Codes.

11.2.8.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Pool Codes

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 395
Configuration Guide

2. Choose New Entries, and assign the pool codes for North Dakota with description.

Figure 11.33 Tax 2.0 ND Pool Codes Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 396
Configuration Guide

11.2.8.9 Maintain Post Codes

11.2.8.9.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the post codes for North Dakota.

11.2.8.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Post Codes

2. Choose New Entries, you assign postal codes for North Dakota and its description.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 397
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.34 Tax 2.0 ND Posting Codes Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 398
Configuration Guide

11.2.8.10 Maintain Marketing Code XRef

11.2.8.10.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the marketing code Cross Reference between Product Code and North Dakota
Marketing Types.

11.2.8.10.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Marketing Code XRef

2. Choose New Entries, and assign the Marketing Code Reference to Product Code and Marketing Type.

Figure 11.35 Tax 2.0 - ND - Marketing Type Xref Overview

3. Click Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 399
Configuration Guide

11.2.8.11 Maintain Standard Rejection Code

Description

11.2.8.11.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Maintain Standard Rejection Code Description

Refer to 11.2.1.8 for steps.

11.2.8.12 Enhancement - Maintain Report / Reporting

Company / Product Code XRef

11.2.8.12.1 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Tax → Report Specific Configuration →
North Dakota → Enhancement → Maintain Report / Reporting Company / Product Code
Xref

Refer to 11.2.1.11.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 400
Configuration Guide

11.3 Royalty

11.3.1 Texas

11.3.1.1 Enable Report

11.3.1.1.1 Use

Use this activity to enable all the Texas process ID’s or reports which will be active in System.

11.3.1.1.2 Activities

Use this IMG activity to enable all the Texas process ID’s or reports which will be active in System.

11.3.1.1.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Enable Report

2. Specify the Process ID’s and set Enabled Flag to active it.

Figure 11.36 Roy 2.9 TX - Process Enable Config Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 401
Configuration Guide

3. Choose Save.

11.3.1.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.3.1.2.1 Use

Use this activity to Maintain First Reporting Month and Year for the Texas Process ID and reporting Company.

11.3.1.2.2 Activities

Use this IMG activity to maintain the first reporting month and year for the Texas Process ID and reporting Company.

11.3.1.2.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain First Reporting Month

2. Specify the Reporting Month for the Process Id’s and Reporting Company.

Figure 11.37 Roy 2.0 TX - First Reporting Month Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 402
Configuration Guide

11.3.1.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.3.1.3.1 Use

Maintaining reporting Companies.

11.3.1.3.2 Activities

In this IMG activity, you can define the Reporting Companies for Texas Process Id’s.

11.3.1.3.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Reporting Companies

2. Maintain the Reporting Company and its Description for the Particular Process ID.

Figure 11.38 Roy 2.0 TX - Reporting Companies Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 403
Configuration Guide

11.3.1.4 Maintain Reporting Company/Company Xref

11.3.1.4.1 Use

Assign PRA Company to Reporting Company Created above.

11.3.1.4.2 Activities

In this IMG activity, you can assign PRA Company to the Reporting Companies for Texas Process Id’s.

11.3.1.4.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Reporting Company/Company XRef

2. Maintain the Company Code for the Reporting Company created above and Process ID.

Figure 11.39 Roy 2.0 TX - Reporting Company/Company XRef Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 404
Configuration Guide

11.3.1.5 Maintain Texas GLO / A&M Number Ranges

11.3.1.5.1 Use

Maintaining Number Ranges for Texas.

11.3.1.5.2 Activities

Use this activity to Maintain Number Ranges for different Objects and Logical tables for the Change document.

11.3.1.5.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Texas GLO / A&M Number Ranges

2. You can maintain it at Object level and at Different Logical table’s level.

Figure 11.40 Maintain Texas GLO / A&M Number Ranges

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 405
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.41 Number Ranges Interval Assignments to PRA Tables Overview

3. Save and Exit.

11.3.1.6 Maintain GLO1 Entire Royalty Obligation

Threshold

11.3.1.6.1 Use

Maintaining Threshold value for the Entire Royalty Obligation flag for GLO1 (Oil) Report.

11.3.1.6.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to maintain the Threshold value for Entire Royalty Obligation Flag for GLO1 (Oil) Report.

11.3.1.6.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain GLO1 Entire Royalty Obligation Threshold

2. Enter the Threshold Value.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 406
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.42 Royalty 2.0 - TX GLO/TAMU - GLO1 Threshold

3. Save and exit.

11.3.1.7 Maintain GLO2 Entire Royalty Obligation

Threshold

11.3.1.7.1 Use

Maintaining Threshold value for the Entire Royalty Obligation flag for GLO2 (Gas) Report.

11.3.1.7.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to maintain Threshold value for the Entire Royalty Obligation flag for GLO2 (Gas) Report.

11.3.1.7.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain GLO2 Entire Royalty Obligation Threshold

2. Select the Disposition Code and Enter Its Threshold Value.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 407
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.43 Adding New Entries

3. Save and exit.

11.3.1.8 Maintain Standard Reject Codes Descriptions

11.3.1.8.1 Use

Maintaining already existing Standard Reject Codes Descriptions.

11.3.1.8.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to maintain the Standard Reject Codes (which is used as basis to reject a record) Descriptions
for Different States.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 408
Configuration Guide

11.3.1.8.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Standard Reject Codes Descriptions

2. Enter the Description.

Figure 11.44 Royalty 2.0 - Texas GLO / A&M - Reject Codes Overview

3. Save and exit.

11.3.1.9 Maintain Custom Reject Codes

11.3.1.9.1 Use

Maintain Custom Reject Codes apart from already available standard codes.

11.3.1.9.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to Maintain Custom Reject Codes based on which the records will be rejected which is not
covered under standard Reject Codes.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 409
Configuration Guide

11.3.1.9.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Maintain Custom Reject Codes

2. Click New Entries and maintain the code and its description.

Figure 11.45 Royalty 2.0 - Texas GLO / A&M - Custom Reject Codes Overview

3. Save and exit.

11.3.1.10 Maintain Report/Reporting

Company/Product Code XREF

11.3.1.10.1 Use

Use this activity to map all the PRA product codes for the Texas reporting company and process ID’s.

11.3.1.10.2 Activities

Use this IMG activity to map all the PRA product code for the Texas reporting company and process ID’s.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 410
Configuration Guide

11.3.1.10.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Texas → Enhancements → Maintain Report/Reporting Company/Product Code Xref

2. Specify the Reporting Company and Product for the Texas process ID’s.

Figure 11.46 Roy 2.0 TX - Process / Reporting Company / Prod Overview

3. Choose Save.

11.3.2 Wyoming

11.3.2.1 Enable Report

11.3.2.1.1 Use

Use this activity to enable all the Wyoming process ID’s or reports which will be active in System.

11.3.2.1.2 Activities

Use this IMG activity to enable all the Wyoming process ID’s or reports which will be active in System.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 411
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.1.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Enable Report

2. Specify the Process Id’s and Set “Enabled” Flag to active it.

Figure 11.47 Roy 2.0 WY - Process Enable Config Overview

3. Choose Save.

11.3.2.2 Maintain First Reporting Month

11.3.2.2.1 Use

Use this activity to maintain first reporting month and year for the Wyoming Process ID and reporting Company.

11.3.2.2.2 Activities

Use this IMG activity to maintain the First Reporting Month and year for the Wyoming Process ID and Reporting
Company.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 412
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.2.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain First Reporting Month

2. Specify the Reporting Month for the Wyoming Process Id’s and Reporting Company.

Figure 11.48 Roy 2.0 WY - First Reporting Month Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 413
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.3 Maintain Reporting Companies

11.3.2.3.1 Use

Maintaining Reporting Companies.

11.3.2.3.2 Activities

In this IMG activity, you can define the Reporting Companies for Wyoming Process Id’s.

11.3.2.3.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Reporting Companies

2. Maintain the Reporting Company and its Description for the Particular Process ID.

Figure 11.49 Roy 2.0 WY - Reporting Companies Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 414
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.4 Maintain Reporting Company/Company Xref

11.3.2.4.1 Use

Assign PRA Company to Reporting Company Created above.

11.3.2.4.2 Activities

In this IMG activity, you can assign PRA Company to the Reporting Companies for Wyoming Process Id’s.

11.3.2.4.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Reporting Company/Company XRef

2. Maintain the Company Code for the Reporting Company created above and Process ID.

Figure 11.50 Roy 2.0 WY - Reporting Company / Company XRef Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 415
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.5 Maintain Wyoming Number Ranges

11.3.2.5.1 Use

Maintaining Number Ranges for Wyoming.

11.3.2.5.2 Activities

Use this activity to Maintain Number Ranges for different Objects and Logical tables for the Change document.

11.3.2.5.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Texas GLO / A&M Number Ranges

2. You can maintain it at Object level and at Different Logical table’s level.

Figure 11.51 Maintain Wyoming Number Ranges

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 416
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.6 Maintain Standard Reject Codes Descriptions

11.3.2.6.1 Use

Maintaining already existing Standard Reject Codes Descriptions.

11.3.2.6.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to maintain the Standard Reject Codes (which is used as basis to reject a record) Descriptions
for Different States.

11.3.2.6.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Standard Reject Codes Descriptions

2. Enter the Description.

Figure 11.52 Royalty 2.0 - WY - Reject Codes Overview

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 417
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.7 Maintain Custom Reject Codes

11.3.2.7.1 Use

Maintain Custom Reject Codes apart from already available Standard Codes.

11.3.2.7.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to Maintain Custom Reject Codes based on which the records will be rejected which is not
covered under standard Reject Codes.

11.3.2.7.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Custom Reject Codes

2. Click New Entries and maintain the code and its description.

Figure 11.53 Royalty 2.0 - WY - Reject Codes

3. Save and exit.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 418
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.8 Maintain Report/Reporting Company/Product

Code XREF

11.3.2.8.1 Use

Use this activity to map all the PRA product code for the Wyoming Reporting Company and process ID’s.

11.3.2.8.2 Activities

Use this IMG activity to map all the PRA Product Codes for the Wyoming Reporting Company and Process ID’s.

11.3.2.8.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Enhancements → Maintain Report/Reporting Company/Product Code Xref

2. Specify the Reporting company and Product for the Texas process ID’s.

Figure 11.54 Roy 2.0 WY - Process / Reporting Company / Prod Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 419
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.9 Maintain Wyoming Product Code Xref

11.3.2.9.1 Use

Use this activity to map the Wyoming Agency Product Code to PRA Product Code.

11.3.2.9.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to map the Wyoming Agency Product Code to PRA Product Code.

11.3.2.9.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Wyoming Product Code XRef

2. Click New Entries to map the codes to existing internal code.

Figure 11.55 Royalty 2.0 - WY - Product Code Xref Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 420
Configuration Guide

11.3.2.10 Maintain Marketing Code Xref

11.3.2.10.1 Use

Use this activity to assign WY Product code and PRA Marketing code to the corresponding WY Marketing type.

11.3.2.10.2 Activities

Use this IMG Activity to assign WY Product code and PRA Marketing code to the corresponding WY Marketing type.

11.3.2.10.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Tax & Royalty Reporting → Royalty → Report Specific Configuration →
Wyoming → Maintain Wyoming Marketing Code XRef

2. Click New Entries to map the product code to marketing code and to corresponding marketing type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 421
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.56 Mapping Marketing Code to Product Code

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 422
Configuration Guide

11.4 Enhancement

11.4.1 Maintain Report Types

11.4.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity to Maintain Report types and its frequency that will be used in System.

11.4.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Enhancements → Maintain Report Types

2. You can maintain Report Type and its frequency.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 423
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.57 Reporting - Report Types Overview

3. Save and exit.

11.4.2 Maintain Report Periods

11.4.2.1 Use

In this activity to Maintain Report types and its period and description that will be used in System.

11.4.2.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Enhancements → Maintain Report Periods

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 424
Configuration Guide

2. You can maintain Report Type and the period and its description.

Figure 11.58 Reporting - Reporting Periods Overview

3. Save and exit.

11.4.3 Maintain Report Processes

11.4.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity Maintain Different Details for Report types and its mapping to Process IDs.

11.4.3.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Enhancements → Maintain Report Processes

2. You can maintain Different Details for Report Type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 425
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.59 Reporting - Reporting Processes Overview

3. Save and exit.

11.4.4 Maintain Process Tabs

11.4.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity to Maintain Different Tabs and its corresponding program and screen for Report Types which will
be called for that particular tabs

11.4.4.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Process Specific
Configuration → Enhancements → Maintain Process Tabs

2. You can maintain Different Tabs for Report Type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 426
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.60 Reporting - Process Tabs Overview

3. Save and exit.

11.4.5 Maintain Process Types

11.4.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the Process Number for each Process in 2.0 and use this number for future
reference and the Master Class/Program which will be called for that process.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 427
Configuration Guide

11.4.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Enhancements →
Maintain Process Types

2. Maintain the Process type, its description and its corresponding detail.

Figure 11.61 Proc 2.0 - Process Types Overview

3. Choose Save.

11.4.6 Maintain Process Type Tabs

11.4.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the tabs for each Process type and maintain the program and screen which will be
called for each Tab.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 428
Configuration Guide

11.4.6.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Enhancements →
Maintain Process Type Tabs

2. Maintain the Process Type, Tab Number and its corresponding details.

Figure 11.62 Proc 2.0 - Process Type Tabs Overview

3. Choose Save.

11.4.7 Maintain Processes

11.4.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can create Process IDs and link each Process ID for a particular Process Type defined above
and their corresponding Master Program.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 429
Configuration Guide

11.4.7.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Enhancements →
Maintain Processes

2. Map the Process type to Process ID and its corresponding details.

Figure 11.63 Proc 2.0 - Processes Overview

3. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 430
Configuration Guide

11.4.8 Maintain Process Steps

11.4.8.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can maintain the Processing steps of each process id, define the sequence of steps, make it
run alone or skip it, and map it to methods of the class to be called for that process step.

11.4.8.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Enhancements →
Maintain Process Steps

2. Maintain the Process step and the sequence for them for each ID.

3. Set “Run Alone”, if that step cannot run together with any other step.

4. Set “Enabled” to enable the step and Set “Skipped” to skip the particular steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 431
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.64 Proc 2.0 - Process Steps Overview

5. Choose Save.

11.4.9 Maintain Prerequisite Step Status

11.4.9.1 Use

In this IMG activity to maintain the Prerequisites for a particular step in reporting.

11.4.9.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing → Enhancements →
Maintain Prerequisite Step Status

2. Set the Status (from the dropdown) of the previous step to be fulfilled for the current step to proceed.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 432
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.65 Proc 2.0 - Step Prerequisite Status Overview

3. Choose Save.

11.5 Tax and Royalty Reporting Portal

11.5.1 Maintain Report Profiles

11.5.1.1 Use

Use this transaction to specify the following information for tax and royalty reports:
• Reporting entity identification numbers.
• Contact information for the individual representing the reporting company.
• Royalty owner information.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 433
Configuration Guide

11.5.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Maintain Report Profiles. The
Tax and Royalty Profile: Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.66 Reporting Profile - Initial Screen

2. Specify a report and its corresponding effective dates and contact information.

Figure 11.67 Reporting Profile - Record Creation

3. Save the Profile.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 434
Configuration Guide

11.5.2 Texas Tax

11.5.2.1 Tax Lease Maintenance

11.5.2.1.1 Use

To identify a Lease as an Oil or a Gas Lease. You can indicate whether a Drilling Permit Number is being reported in
place of a Lease Number. This is a new field on Texas Tax Reports.

11.5.2.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Tax → Tax Lease Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create click New Entries.

4. Specify the Lease Number, Lease Name, Lease Type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 435
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.68 Texas Lease - Display Record

5. You can also specify RRC lease description by assigning TX County and lease name.

6. Click Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 436
Configuration Guide

11.5.2.2 Texas Master Data

11.5.2.2.1 Use

You link PRA entities (well/well completion, measuring point, venture/division of interest) to state-specific reporting
attributes:
• The API well number
• This is a new field on Texas tax reports.
• The Texas Comptroller’s county identifier.
• The state-assigned lease number.
• Whether sales are delivered on or off the lease.
• This is a new field on Texas tax reports.
• Overrides for on-lease/off-lease in the case of multiple on-lease/off-lease scenarios.

11.5.2.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Tax → Texas Master Data.

Figure 11.69 Texas Master Data - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 437
Configuration Guide

3. To Create Texas Master Data, Click New Entries.

Figure 11.70 Texas Master Data - Initial Screen

4. Specify the report ID and its corresponding linkage to well / well completion, Measuring Point or Venture / DOI.

5. Specify Effective to Date, TX County, Lease Number, On/Off lease.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 438
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.71 Texas Master Data - Display Record

6. Choose Save.

11.5.2.3 Maintain Auto Suspension Data

11.5.2.3.1 Use

You specify Auto Suspension criteria for the Texas tax reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do
not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 439
Configuration Guide

You can create suspension criteria by:

• Sales Date, if you want to suspend all reporting activity prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales
Dates.
• PRA entity, if you want to suspend all Reporting Activity for a specific PRA entity (for example, Well Completion)
prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales Dates, for example, State Entity, if you want to suspend
all reporting activity for a specific State lease number prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales
Dates.

11.5.2.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Tax → Maintain Auto Suspension Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To Create Texas Auto Suspend Master Data, click New Entries. Report ID is tied up to Well / Well Completion,
Measuring Point, Venture / DOI, State Lease Number or All.

Figure 11.72 Texas Auto Suspend Master Data - Create Record

4. You can assign suspension level at high level, PRA entity level, state entity level and assign Sales Date Criteria
at all sales dates, all PPA sales dates, sales date range to report ID.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 440
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.73 Texas Auto Suspend Master Data - Create Record

5. Enter criteria description, and click Save.

11.5.2.4 Maintain Business Associate Tax IDs

11.5.2.4.1 Use

It is necessary because Texas producer reports need to indicate the purchaser’s Taxpayer Number.

11.5.2.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Tax → Maintain Business Associate
Tax IDs..

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create Texas Other Party Tax ID, click New Entries.

4. Specify other party number and effective from date and click Continue.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 441
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.74 Texas Other Party Tax ID - Initial Screen

5. Specify Effective To Date and Tax Payer No.

Figure 11.75 Texas Other Party Tax ID - Display Record

6. Click Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 442
Configuration Guide

11.5.2.5 Maintain Statue-Of-Limitation Data

11.5.2.5.1 Use

This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are
Out-of-Statute. You can create Statute-of-Limitations criteria by:
• Before Sales date, if you want to indicate that all reporting activity prior to a specific sales date is out of statute
and is not to be reported.
• Limit By Period, if you want to indicate that all reporting activity for specific number of months before the current
month is out of statute and is not to be reported

Transactions that meet the specified criteria are not reported to the State, but the financial impact of these
adjustments is journalized. After you have run a report, you can view Out-of-Statute transactions and write them off in
the Out-of-Statute Write-Off Maintenance report.

11.5.2.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Tax → Maintain Statute-Of-Limitation
Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create click New Entries.

Figure 11.76 Texas Statute of Limitation Master Data - Display Record

4. Click Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 443
Configuration Guide

11.5.2.6 Maintain SOL Exception

11.5.2.6.1 Use

This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All Tax Data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.2.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Tax → Maintain SOL Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create click New Entries.

4. Specify Report ID. Exception Description and Exception Entities can be assigned by finding entities either at well,
well completion, MP, JV, DOI, Lease No.

Figure 11.77 Texas Statute of Limitation Exception - Display Record

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 444
Configuration Guide

5. Specify Sales Date criteria and click Save.

11.5.3 Oklahoma Tax

11.5.3.1 Oklahoma BA Tax ID Maintenance

11.5.3.1.1 Use

To create a Cross Reference between PRA Business Associate Number and Taxpayer Number. This is necessary
because the Oklahoma gross production reports must indicate the producer or purchaser Taxpayer Number.

11.5.3.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Oklahoma Tax → Oklahoma BA Tax ID
Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.3 for steps.

11.5.3.2 Oklahoma Master Data Maintenance

11.5.3.2.1 Use

To link PRA entities (Well / Well Completion, Measurement Point, Venture / Division of Interest) to state-specific
reporting attributes:
• Production unit number
• Gas code
• Oil class
• County of production

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 445
Configuration Guide

11.5.3.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Oklahoma Tax → Oklahoma → Oklahoma
Master Data Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.1 for steps.

11.5.3.3 Maintain Auto-Suspension Data

11.5.3.3.1 Use

To specify Auto-Suspension criteria for the Oklahoma Tax Reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that you
do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.
You can create suspension criteria by
• Sales Date, if you want to suspend all reporting activity prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales
Dates.
• PRA entity, if you want to suspend all reporting activity for a specific PRA entity (for example, Well Completion)
prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales Date, for example State Entity, if you want to suspend
all reporting activity for a specific State Lease Number prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales
Dates.

11.5.3.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Oklahoma Tax → Oklahoma → Oklahoma
Maintain Auto-Suspension Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 446
Configuration Guide

11.5.3.4 Maintain Statue-of-Limitation Data

11.5.3.4.1 Use

To specify exceptions to the above Statute-of-Limitations criteria at lease level for a specific Sales Date or range of
Sales Dates. This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria
should be overridden. All Tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.
You suspended tax data for a specific lease pending the outcome of a litigation process. However, during this time,
the data to be reported aged to the point that it became out of statute. Now, you create an exception so that you can
report the tax data even though it is out of statute.

11.5.3.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Oklahoma Tax → Oklahoma → Maintain
Statute-of-Limitation Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.4 for steps.

11.5.3.5 Maintain SOL Exception

11.5.3.5.1 Use

To specify exceptions to the above Statute-of-Limitations criteria at Lease Level for a specific Sales Date or range of
Sales Dates. This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria
should be overridden. All Tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

You suspended Tax data for a specific lease pending the outcome of a Litigation Process. However, during this time,
the data to be reported aged to the point that it became Out-of-Statute. Now, you create an exception so that you can
report the Tax data even though it is out of Statute.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 447
Configuration Guide

11.5.3.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Oklahoma Tax → Oklahoma → Maintain SOL
Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.5 for steps.

11.5.3.6 Maintain Oklahoma Zero Vol Reporting

11.5.3.6.1 Use

Oklahoma requires zero-volume reporting for all applicable Production Unit Numbers. It allows you to set up the
appropriate keys, which should be reported if no Sales Volume exists for a Production Month.

11.5.3.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Oklahoma Tax → Oklahoma → Maintain
Oklahoma Zero Vol Reporting.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new data, click new and assign company reporting no, Production unit number, tax payer number
county and product code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 448
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.78 Oklahoma Zero Vol Rpt - Create Record

4. Click Save.

11.5.3.7 OKGP Tax Rate Maintenance

11.5.3.7.1 Use

To specify Tax Rates for different Tax Types, such as PR, EX, MP, RF, and the Tax Class and Product Code
combination. The Tax Rates are used to recalculate the Tax Amount to confirm the footing differences if applicable.
This transaction is used in the correct-all process for a report run. The rounding differences are valued using the Tax
Rates you specify here.

11.5.3.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Oklahoma Tax → Oklahoma → Tax 2.0 OKGP
Rate Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create tax rates, click New Entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 449
Configuration Guide

4. Specify the severance tax.

Figure 11.79 OKGP Tax Rate Codes - Detail Screen

5. Specify the tax class.

Figure 11.80 OKGP Tax Rate Codes - Detail Screen

6. Specify the product code, Effective date and tax rate.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 450
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.81 OKGP Tax Rate Codes - Detail Screen

7. Click Save.

11.5.4 Wyoming Tax

11.5.4.1 Wyoming BA Operator ID

11.5.4.1.1 Use

To create a Cross Reference between PRA Business Associate Number and Taxpayer Number. This is necessary
because Wyoming Severance and Conservation must indicate the producer’s Taxpayer Number.

11.5.4.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 Wyoming BA
Operator ID.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.3 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 451
Configuration Guide

11.5.4.2 Wyoming Zero Volume Master

11.5.4.2.1 Use

A Zero Return is required on a group that had no production/sales for a given month, but it is still an Active Property.
Any Active Property that is not reported results in a severance unreported properties letter being issued. Do not
report Zeros for shut in/plugged wells.

You would report a group for the first time based upon the Well Registration Information that is provided to Wyoming.
If a Well becomes active in a certain month, but has no sales/production, Wyoming would have the Well as active for
that month and would issue the unreported letter if no return was filed with that group.

For Zero Reporting, a Zero Report Master is created if you enter values in the Oil/Gas Indicator, Operator ID, Report
Group Number, and Rate Code fields.

11.5.4.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 Wyoming Zero
Volume Master.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new data, click new and assign.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 452
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.82 Wyoming Zero Vol Rpt - Display Record

4. Click Save.

11.5.4.3 Wyoming Master data

11.5.4.3.1 Use

To link PRA entities (Well / Well Completion, Measurement Point, Venture / Division of Interest) to state-specific
reporting attributes:

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 453
Configuration Guide

• State of Wyoming’s county identifier for reporting purposes

• Reporting group number assigned by the state
• API number for the producing entity
• Field number and name for reporting on the Wyoming reports
• Unit/lease number and name for reporting on the Wyoming reports
• Tax district the well is associated with for audit purposes, this transaction also contains administration
information including the user who last changed a PRA entity, and the date and time of the last change.

11.5.4.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 Wyoming Master
Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.1 for steps.

11.5.4.4 Wyoming Auto Suspend Master

11.5.4.4.1 Use

To specify auto-suspension criteria for the Wyoming tax reports. This allows you to specify tax records that you do
not want to be processed during tax reporting.

You can create suspension criteria by

• Sales Date, if you want to suspend all reporting activity prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales
Dates.
• PRA entity, if you want to suspend all reporting activities for a specific PRA entity (for example, Well
Completion) prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales Date, for example State Entity, if you want
to suspend all reporting activity for a specific State Lease Number prior to a specific Sales Date or across a
range of Sales Dates.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 454
Configuration Guide

11.5.4.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 Wyoming Auto
Suspend Master.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.3 for steps.

11.5.4.5 Wyoming Statute of Limitations

11.5.4.5.1 Use

To specify Statute-of-Limitations criteria for the Wyoming Tax Reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that
you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are out of Statute.

You can create statute-of-limitations criteria by

• Sales Date, if you want to indicate that all reporting activity prior to a specific Sales Date is out of Statute and is
not to be reported.
• Filing Period, if you want to indicate that all reporting activity for specific number of months before the current
month is out of statute and is not to be reported.
• Transactions that meet the specified criteria are not reported to the State, but the financial impacts of these
adjustments are journalized. After you have run a report, you can view Out-of-Statute transactions and write
them off in the Out-of-Statute Write-Off Maintenance report.

11.5.4.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 Wyoming Statue of
Limit.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 455
Configuration Guide

11.5.4.6 Wyoming SOL Exception

11.5.4.6.1 Use

To specify exceptions to the above Statute-of-Limitations criteria at the lease level for a specific Sales Date or range
of Sales Dates. This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations
criteria should be overridden. All tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.4.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 Wyoming SOL
Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.5 for steps.

11.5.4.7 Wyoming LCD Override

11.5.4.7.1 Use

To indicate whether Condensate Volumes from the state of Wyoming must be reported as if processed through a Gas
plant. This master file is set up for a Well / WC, MP, DOI and Effective Date.

11.5.4.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 Wyoming LCD
Override.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new record, click New Entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 456
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.83 Wyoming LCD Override - Display Record

4. Click Save.

11.5.4.8 WYS Tax Rate Maintenance

11.5.4.8.1 Use

To specify the Severance Tax Rate for different Rate Codes, and the Oil / Gas and incentive type combination. This
is used during the correct-all process for a report run. The rounding difference is valued using the Tax Rates you
specify here.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 457
Configuration Guide

11.5.4.8.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 WYS Tax Rate
Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.7 for steps.

11.5.4.9 WYC Tax Rate Maintenance

11.5.4.9.1 Use

To specify the Conservation Tax Rate for a period. This transaction is used during the correct-all process for a report
run. The rounding difference is valued using the Tax Rates you specify here.

11.5.4.9.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Tax → Tax 2.0 WYC Tax Rate
Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.7 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 458
Configuration Guide

11.5.5 New Mexico

11.5.5.1 Maintain New Mexico Master

11.5.5.1.1 Use

To link PRA entities (Well / Well Completion, Measurement Point, Venture / Division of Interest) to the state-specific
reporting attribute PUN (production unit number).

11.5.5.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico
Master.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.1 for steps.

11.5.5.2 Maintain New Mexico Auto-Suspend

11.5.5.2.1 Use

To specify Auto-Suspension criteria for the New Mexico Tax Reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that you
do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.

You can create suspension criteria by:

• Sales Date, if you want to suspend all reporting activity prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales
Dates.
• PRA entity, if you want to suspend all reporting activity for a specific PRA entity (for example, Well Completion)
prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales Date, for example State Entity, if you want to suspend
all reporting activity for a specific State Lease Number prior to a specific Sales Date or across a range of Sales
Dates.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 459
Configuration Guide

11.5.5.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico Auto
Suspend.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.3 for steps.

11.5.5.3 Maintain New Mexico Statute-of-Limitations

11.5.5.3.1 Use

To specify Statute-of-Limitations criteria for the New Mexico Tax Reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that
you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are out of Statute.

You can create statute-of-limitations criteria by

• Sales Date, if you want to indicate that all reporting activities prior to a specific Sales Date is out of Statute and
is not to be reported.
• Filing period, if you want to indicate that all reporting activity for specific number of months before the Current
Month is out of Statute and is not to be reported.

Transactions that meet the specified criteria are not reported to the State, but the financial impacts of these
adjustments are journalized. After you have run a report, you can view Out-of-Statute transactions and write them off
in the Out-of-Statute Write-Off Maintenance report.

11.5.5.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico
Statute-of-Limit.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 460
Configuration Guide

11.5.5.4 Maintain SOL Exception

11.5.5.4.1 Use

To specify exceptions to the above Statute-of-Limitations criteria at the lease level for a specific Sales Date or Range
of Sales Dates. This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations
criteria should be overridden. All Tax Data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.5.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain SOL Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.5 for steps.

11.5.5.5 Maintain New Mexico Jicarilla Credit

11.5.5.5.1 Use

To maintain the New Mexico Jicarilla Credit, which indicates an entry taking a tax credit as a result of a qualifying well
with respect to oil and gas production from Jicarilla Apache tribal land. It is an offset to the tax imposed by the Jicarilla
Apache Nation, and identified as the Jicarilla Apache Tribal Capital Improvements Tax. The volume, value,
deductions, royalty should be left blank. Use parenthesis in the Tax Due Column for the tax credit amount.

11.5.5.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico
Jicarilla Credit.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new record, click New, assign production unit number and suffix which should start with ‘I’.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 461
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.84 New Mexico Jicarilla Credit Master - Initial Screen

4. Click Continue, and then click Save.

Figure 11.85 New Mexico Jicarilla Credit Master - After Clicking Save

11.5.5.6 Maintain New Mexico Aff Cd Override

11.5.5.6.1 Use

To indicate that the line entry being reported was transported, processed or sold through an affiliated or non-arm's
length transaction. If the line entry being reported was transported, processed or sold through an arm’s length
transaction, use 00.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 462
Configuration Guide

11.5.5.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico Aff
Cd Override.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new records, click Create and assign the contract number.

Figure 11.86 New Mexico Affiliation Code Override - Initial Screen

4. Assign NM Affil Code.

Figure 11.87 New Mexico Affiliation Code Override - Display Record

5. Click Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 463
Configuration Guide

11.5.5.7 Maintain New Mexico Oth Exmpt Owners

11.5.5.7.1 Use

To specify the owners who are exempted and exist as Entity Type Code 04 (State) even though they are not actually
royalty owners in the system. These owners have the owner Interest Type Code RT and Interest Category Code W.
You use this transaction for the reporting of specific business scenarios.

11.5.5.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico Oth
Exmpt Owners.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new records, click New Record and assign Owner.

Figure 11.88 NM Other Exempt Owners - Initial Screen

4. Click Continue. The record is created.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 464
Configuration Guide

11.5.5.8 Maintain NM Auto Suspend Exception

11.5.5.8.1 Use

To define any exceptions to the Statute-of-Limitations criteria established through the Statute-of-Limitations
Maintenance Transaction for the New Mexico Tax Reports. An example of the need for this functionality is the
situation where tax data may be suspended by the user for litigation, audit, or other validation purposes and during
this time frame, the data to be reported ages to the point that it becomes Out-of-Statute. With this exception
functionality, those cases can be reported even if the tax data is Out-of-Statute. The criteria are defined by a system
generated criteria number and a user defined criteria description. For a specific Report ID, you can establish
exceptions to the Statute-of-Limitations criteria at the State Lease level for a specific Sales Date or range of Sales
Dates. In establishing these criteria, you define the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations
criteria should be overridden. All tax data that meets these criteria are reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.5.8.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain NM Auto
Suspend Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new record, click New, specify the Report ID and ASUE level either at PRA entity level or State Entity
Level.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 465
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.89 NM Auto Suspend Exception - Initial Screen

4. Click Continue.

5. Enter ASUE description and adding Exception entities either at Well / Well Completion, JV, DOI, MP and assign
Sales Date criteria for correspondent.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 466
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.90 NM Auto Suspend Exception - Display Record

6. Click Save.

11.5.5.9 Upload Suffix Tax Rates

11.5.5.9.1 Use

To upload the Tax Rates that are published every year by the state of New Mexico. Instead of maintaining the Tax
Rates manually for every suffix, this transaction can use the Excel sheet published by the state of New Mexico as
input and upload the data.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 467
Configuration Guide

11.5.5.9.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Tax 2.0 Upload Suffix Tax
Rates.

2. While uploading Excel sheet, the values should be in the listed column order below:
• Secondary Geographical Location Description
• New Mexico Municipality Name
• School district code
• New Mexico Suffix for School Dist Code
• Effective from date
• Effective To Date
• Kind
• Valuation Rate – SV Tax Rate
• Valuation Rate – ES Tax Rate
• Valuation Rate – CN Tax Rate
• Valuation Rate – AV Tax Rate

3. Click Execute to upload Excel sheet.

11.5.5.10 Maintain New Mexico Suffix Cross-Ref

11.5.5.10.1 Use

To specify the tax rates for the for tax types (AV, CN, ES & SV) for a suffix and major Product Code combination.
This transaction allows you to maintain a Secondary Geographical Location, municipality, and school district code for
a record.

11.5.5.10.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico
Suffix Cross Ref.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 468
Configuration Guide

3. To create new record, click New. Assign Geo Loc., suffix, major product code, AV, CN, ES, SV tax rate.

Figure 11.91 NM Suffix Data - Detail Screen

4. Click Save.

11.5.5.11 Maintain New Mexico Suffix Decimal

11.5.5.11.1 Use

To specify a PRA entity (Venture / MP / Well), and a major Product Code for a royalty entity code (Federal, Indian,
Others, Private, and State) with the suffix and royalty entity/owner’s share (suffix decimal) in that suffix.

This decimal and the Tax Rates, which are specified, are used by the valuation process to re-value a property for
suffix and Royalty Entity combination.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 469
Configuration Guide

If the Royalty Entity Code is others, you must also enter the related Entity Type.

If multiple suffixes are specified, the sum of the suffix decimals cannot be less than and more than 1.

11.5.5.11.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → New Mexico Tax → Maintain New Mexico
Suffix Decimal.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new record, click New, select any from Suffix Decimal Level. Should be at DOI, Well/Well Completion,
MP.

4. Assign Suffix Decimal and Suffix tied up with well/well completion, DOI, MP.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 470
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.92 NM Suffix Decimal - Detail Screen

5. Click Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 471
Configuration Guide

11.5.6 Kansas Tax

11.5.6.1 Kansas Lease Maintenance

11.5.6.1.1 Use

To identify a Lease as an Oil or a Gas Lease.

11.5.6.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Kansas Tax → Kansas Lease Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.6 for steps.

11.5.6.2 Kansas Master Data

11.5.6.2.1 Use

You link PRA entities for Well / Well Completion.

11.5.6.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Kansas Tax → Kansas Master Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.1 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 472
Configuration Guide

11.5.6.3 Kansas Auto-Suspension Data

11.5.6.3.1 Use

You specify Auto-Suspension criteria for the Kansas Tax Reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do
not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.

11.5.6.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Kansas Tax → Kansas Auto-Suspension Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.2 for steps.

11.5.6.4 Kansas Statute of Limitation Data

11.5.6.4.1 Use

This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are
Out-of-Statute.

11.5.6.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Kansas Tax → Kansas Statute of Limitation
Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 473
Configuration Guide

11.5.6.5 Maintain SOL Exception

11.5.6.5.1 Use

This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.6.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Kansas Tax → Kansas SOL Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.5 for steps.

11.5.6.6 Maintain Tax Class XRef

11.5.6.6.1 Use

This allows you to specify the Certificate Number or Exemption code for tax class and contract number.

11.5.6.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Kansas Tax → Kansas Tax Class XRef.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new record, click New, select volume type or contract number and give the corresponding details in the
pop up screen.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 474
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.93 Kansas Tax Class Xref Record Creation

4. Enter either certificate number or assign exemption flag for particular tax class of volume type or contract
number.

Figure 11.94 Kansas Tax Class Xref Display Record

5. Click Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 475
Configuration Guide

11.5.6.7 Kansas Tax Rate Maintenance

11.5.6.7.1 Use

To specify Tax Rates for different tax types, such as PR, EX, MP, RF, and the Tax Class and Product Code
combination. The tax rates are used to recalculate the tax amount to confirm the footing differences if applicable. This
transaction is used in the correct-all process for a report run. The rounding differences are valued using the Tax
Rates you specify here.

11.5.6.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Kansas Tax → Kansas Tax Rate Maintenance.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.7 for steps.

11.5.7 Louisiana Tax

11.5.7.1 Edit LA Producer / Transporter XRef

11.5.7.1.1 Use

To specify and tie up the Transporter with Producer. Producer is either Customer or Vendor.

11.5.7.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Edit LA Producer /
Transporter XRef.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 476
Configuration Guide

3. To create new data, click New and assign the effective dates and transporter code either to customer or vendor.

Figure 11.95 Producer / Transporter XRef - Display Record

4. Click Save.

11.5.7.2 Maintain Louisiana Lease

11.5.7.2.1 Use

To identify a Lease as an Oil or a Gas Lease.

11.5.7.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Maintain Louisiana Lease.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.6 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 477
Configuration Guide

11.5.7.3 Maintain Louisiana Master

11.5.7.3.1 Use

You link PRA entities for Well / Well Completion, MP, DOI.

11.5.7.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Maintain Louisiana Master.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.1 for steps.

11.5.7.4 Maintain Louisiana Auto-Suspend

11.5.7.4.1 Use

You specify Auto-Suspension criteria for the Louisiana Tax Reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that you
do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.

11.5.7.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Maintain Louisiana Auto-
Suspend.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 478
Configuration Guide

11.5.7.5 Maintain LA Auto-Suspend Exception

11.5.7.5.1 Use

To define any exceptions to the Statute-of-Limitations criteria established through the Statute-of-Limitations
Maintenance Transaction for the New Mexico Tax Reports.

11.5.7.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Maintain LA Auto Suspend
Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.5.8 for steps.

11.5.7.6 Maintain LA Statute-of-Limitations

11.5.7.6.1 Use

This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are
Out-of-Statute.

11.5.7.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Maintain LA Statute of
Limitation.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 479
Configuration Guide

11.5.7.7 Maintain Louisiana SOL Exception

11.5.7.7.1 Use

This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.7.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Maintain Louisiana SOL
Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.5 for steps.

11.5.7.8 Maintain Incentive Master

11.5.7.8.1 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Louisiana Tax → Maintain Incentive Master.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 480
Configuration Guide

11.5.8 North Dakota Tax

11.5.8.1 North Dakota Master Data

11.5.8.1.1 Use

You link PRA entities for Well / Well Completion.

11.5.8.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → North Dakota Master
Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.1 for steps.

11.5.8.2 ND Statute-of-Limitations Data

11.5.8.2.1 Use

This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are
Out-of-Statute.

11.5.8.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → ND Statute of Limitation
Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 481
Configuration Guide

3. Refer to 11.4.2.4 for steps.

11.5.8.3 ND SOL Exception

11.5.8.3.1 Use

This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.8.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → ND SOL Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.5 for steps.

11.5.8.4 Maintain Auto-Suspension Data

11.5.8.4.1 Use

You specify Auto-Suspension criteria for the North Dakota tax reports. This allows you to specify Tax Records that
you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.

11.5.8.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → Maintain Auto-
Suspension Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 482
Configuration Guide

11.5.8.5 Maintain ASU Exception Data

11.5.8.5.1 Use

To define any exceptions to the Statute-of-Limitations criteria established through the Statute-of-Limitations
Maintenance Transaction for the Tax Reports.

11.5.8.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → Maintain ASU Exception
Data.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.5.8 for steps.

11.5.8.6 North Dakota Tax Rate

11.5.8.6.1 Use

To specify Tax Rates for different Tax Types, such as PR, EX, MP, RF, and the Tax Class and Product Code
combination. The Tax Rates are used to recalculate the tax amount to confirm the footing differences if applicable.
This transaction is used in the correct-all process for a report run. The rounding differences are valued using the Tax
Rates you specify here.

11.5.8.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → North Dakota Tax Rate.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.3.7 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 483
Configuration Guide

11.5.8.7 North Dakota Customer Taxpayer ID

11.5.8.7.1 Use

To specify the Taxpayer ID number and tied up with customer to specific effective dates.

11.5.8.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → North Dakota Tax
Customer Taxpayer ID.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new data, click New and assign the tax payer ID of customer with effective dates.

Figure 11.96 North Dakota Customer Taxpayer ID - Display Record

4. Click Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 484
Configuration Guide

11.5.8.8 North Dakota Ven/DOI Pool Code Xref

11.5.8.8.1 Use

To specify the joint venture with DOI and Pool Code to the correspondent well/well completion level and tied up to
Report ID.

11.5.8.8.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → North Dakota Tax → North Dakota Tax
Ven/DOI Pool Code Xref.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new data, click New, assign Process ID well/well completion and effective date then click Continue.

4. Assign the Joint venture DOI and Pool code to the report.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 485
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.97 North Dakota Venture - Display Record

5. Click Save.

11.5.9 Colorado Conservation Tax

11.5.9.1 Maintain CO Operator to OGCC Payor XRef

11.5.9.1.1 Use

To specify the Payer number assigned by state to the reporting company with PRA operator.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 486
Configuration Guide

11.5.9.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain CO
Operator to OGCC Payor XRef.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new data, click New, assign the OGCC payor number.

4. Click Save.

Figure 11.98 Operator to OGCC Payor Xref - Display Record

11.5.9.2 Maintain Colorado Auto-Suspend

11.5.9.2.1 Use

You specify Auto-Suspension criteria for the Colorado Conservation tax reports. This allows you to specify Tax
Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.

11.5.9.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain
Colorado Auto-Suspend.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 487
Configuration Guide

11.5.9.3 Maintain CO Auto-Suspend Exception

11.5.9.3.1 Use

To define any exceptions to the Statute-of-Limitations criteria established through the Statute-of-Limitations
maintenance transaction for the Tax Reports.

11.5.9.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain CO
ASU Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

11.5.9.4 Maintain CO Statue-of-Limitations

11.5.9.4.1 Use

This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are
Out-of-Statute.

11.5.9.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain CO
Statute of Limitation.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 488
Configuration Guide

11.5.9.5 Maintain Colorado SOL Exception

11.5.9.5.1 Use

This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.9.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain
Colorado SOL Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.5 for steps.

11.5.9.6 Maintain Colorado Levy Rate

11.5.9.6.1 Use

They specify and maintain the Levy, as is to be reported and submitted quarterly on the COGCC Form 8.

11.5.9.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain
Colorado Levy Rate.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create new data, click New, assign the product code and levy rates for the effective dates.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 489
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.99 Maintain Levy Rates - Display Record

4. Click Save.

11.5.10 Colorado Severance Tax

11.5.10.1 Maintain CO 21PD Statute of Limitation

11.5.10.1.1 Use

This allows you to specify Tax Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting because they are
Out-of-Statute.

11.5.10.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain CO
21PD Statute of Limitation.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.4 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 490
Configuration Guide

11.5.10.2 Maintain CO 21PD Statute-of-Limitations

Exception

11.5.10.2.1 Use

This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All tax data that meets these criteria is reported on the appropriate report.

11.5.10.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain CO
21PD Statute of Limit Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.5 for steps.

11.5.10.3 Maintain CO 21PD Auto-Suspend

11.5.10.3.1 Use

You specify Auto-Suspension criteria for the Colorado Conservation tax reports. This allows you to specify Tax
Records that you do not want to be processed during Tax Reporting.

11.5.10.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain CO
21PD Auto Suspend..

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.2.2 for steps.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 491
Configuration Guide

11.5.10.4 Maintain CO 21PD Auto-Suspend Exception

11.5.10.4.1 Use

To define any exceptions to the Statute-of-Limitations criteria established through the Statute-of-Limitations
maintenance transaction for the Rax Reports.

11.5.10.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Colorado Conservation Tax → Maintain CO
21PD Auto Suspend Exception.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. Refer to 11.4.5.8 for steps.

11.5.11 Texas Royalty

11.5.11.1 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU Lease Master

11.5.11.1.1 Use

Use this Activity to Maintain Lease Details for Different States.

11.5.11.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Tax Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain
Lease Master. The Lease Master Data Initial Screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 492
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.100 Texas GLO/TAMU Lease Master - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new Lease Master, choose Create.

Figure 11.101 Texas GLO/TAMU Lease Master - Initial Screen

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 493
Configuration Guide

4. Specify GLO Lease Number and its Corresponding Attributes.

5. Choose Save.

Figure 11.102 Texas GLO/TAMU Lease Master - Create Record

11.5.11.2 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU Unit Master

11.5.11.2.1 Use

Use this Activity to tie a Lease to a Tract Participation Factor and determine the lowest Lease in the unit. The lowest
Lease Indicator is used to report the production volumes on the reports when multiple Leases are tied to a unit.

11.5.11.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU Unit Master. The Texas GLO/TAMU Unit Master - Initial Screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 494
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.103 Texas GLO/TAMU Unit Master - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a Unit Master, choose Create.

Figure 11.104 Texas GLO/TAMU Unit Master - Record Creation

4. Specify the GLO Unit no and the effective date.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 495
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.105 Texas GLO/TAMU Unit Master - Dsiplay Record

5. Specify all the leases that will be a part of this unit and their participation.

6. Enable the Lowest Track indicator for the lease which will be used for reporting for this unit.

7. Choose Save.

11.5.11.3 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU RRC Master

11.5.11.3.1 Use

Use this Activity to link PRA entities (Well/Well Completion, Measurement Point, and Venture/Division of Interest) to
state-specific reporting attributes.

For audit purposes, this transaction also contains administration information including the user who last changed a
PRA entity, and the date and time of the last changed.

11.5.11.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU RRC Master. The Texas GLO/TAMU RRC Master - Initial Screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 496
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.106 Texas GLO/TAMU RRC Master - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new RRC Master, choose Create.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 497
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.107 Texas GLO/TAMU RRC Master - rECORD cREATION

4. Specify the Report, Well, Well Completion and Effective Date.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 498
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.108 Texas GLO/TAMU RRC Master - Display Record

5. Specify the following attributes:

• District number
• Reference field (add a free form text for the name)
• Lease identifier
• Oil lease
• Gas lease
• Drill permit
• Field name (RRC assigned)
• Lease name (RRC assigned)
• Property alias number (add a user description of the lease or tract being reported)
• Operator number (add the operator of the property or the PRA operator ID number)
• Prod disp report indicator (This places the production dispositions on the GLO1 (oil) or GLO2 (gas). This is used
to identify the non-operated for reporting purposes)

6. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 499
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.4 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU BA Xref

11.5.11.4.1 Use

Use this activity to assign the internal business associate to an external customer number or purchases of Oil and
Gas.

11.5.11.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU BA Xref. The Texas GLO/TAMU BA XRef - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.109 Texas GLO/TAMU BA XRef - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new BA Xref, choose Create.

4. Specify the SAP Customer/Vendor Number which you want to link the State Defined Customer ID for the
effective date.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 500
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.110 Texas GLO/TAMU BA XRef - Record Creation

5. Enter the external Customer ID.

Figure 11.111 Texas GLO/TAMU BA XRef - Display Record

6. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 501
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.5 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU Master Data

11.5.11.5.1 Use

Use this Activity to Link Lease and other attributes to Well/Well Completion or Venture/DOI or Measuring Point Level.

11.5.11.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain Master Data. The Texas GLO/TAMU Report Control - Initial Screen
appears.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Figure 11.112 Texas GLO/TAMU Report Control - Initial Screen

3. To create a new Master Data, choose Create.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 502
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.113 Texas GLO/TAMU Report Control - Record Creation

4. Specify the Report ID, Reporting Company, GLO Lease and its other values.

Figure 11.114 Texas GLO/TAMU Report Control - Create Record

5. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 503
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.6 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU Report Control

Master

11.5.11.6.1 Use

Use this activity to create a master including a Report ID, Reporting Company, GLO Lease, District, Gas, or Oil Lease
indicator to determine the number of expected reports for reporting. This master is also used to manage GLO TIK.

You use this transaction to create a comprehensive list of each Lease/RRC that must be submitted to the state in a
given month. This transaction drives zero- report processing. When you enter information on the selection screen, the
system creates a zero-report record based on a current month report if no revenue recordings exist for that month

11.5.11.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU Rpt Ctrl Master. The Texas GLO/TAMU Report Control - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.115 Texas GLO/TAMU Report Control

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. If a lease/RRC should be reported to the state, you must create a record created using this transaction. Usually,
you only create a record for a Go-Live or in case of a new or discontinued Lease/RRC combination.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 504
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.7 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU ASU Master

11.5.11.7.1 Use

Use this Activity to maintain Auto Suspension criteria to suspend the Royalty Transactions when they are not needed
to be reported for a Business reason.

11.5.11.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain ASU Master Data. The Texas GLO/TAMU Auto Suspend Master - Initial
Screen appears.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Figure 11.116 Texas GLO/TAMU Auto Suspend Master - Initial Screen

3. To create a ew ASU Master, choose Create.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 505
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.117 Texas GLO/TAMU Auto Suspend Master - Create Record

4. You can select the level at which you want to suspend the records - High Level, PRA Level or State Level.

5. For High Level suspension, you can select to suspend the records for all Sales Dates, all PPA Sales Dates or
you can specify a Sales Date Range.

Figure 11.118 Texas GLO/TAMU Auto Suspend Master - Create Record

6. You can also suspend the records on PRA Entity/State level. Specify the selection criteria and it will show the
records which will be suspended.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 506
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.119 Texas GLO/TAMU Auto Suspend Master - Create Record

7. Choose Save.

11.5.11.8 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU SOL Master

11.5.11.8.1 Use

Use this Activity to maintain the Statute of Limitation for the Reporting of the Royalty Transactions.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 507
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.8.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain SOL Master Data. The Texas GLO/TAMU Statute of Limitation - Initial
Screen appears.

Figure 11.120 Texas GLO/TAMU Statute of Limitation - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new SOL Master, choose Create.

Figure 11.121 Texas GLO/TAMU Statute of Limitation - Create Record

4. You can create statute-of-limitations criteria by:

• Sales Date if you want to indicate that all reporting activities prior to a specific Sales Date is Out of Statute and
is not to be reported.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 508
Configuration Guide

• Filing period if you want to indicate that all reporting activities for specific number of months before the current
month is Out of Statute and is not to be reported.
• Transactions that meet the specified criteria are not reported to the state, but the financial impacts of these
adjustments are journalized. After you have run a report, you can view Out of Statute transactions and write
them off in the Out of Statute Write-off maintenance report.

5. Choose Save.

11.5.11.9 Maintain Texas GLO/TAMU SOL Exception

11.5.11.9.1 Use

Use this Activity to specify exceptions to the above-mentioned Statute-of-Limitations criteria at lease level for a
specific Sales Date or range of Sales Dates.

This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates, for which the Statute-of-Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All Royalty data that meets these criteria is reported based on the appropriate report.

11.5.11.9.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain SOL Master Data. The Texas GLO/TAMU Statute of Limitation Exception -
Initial Screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 509
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.122 TX GLO/TAMU Statute of Limitation Exception - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new SOL Exception, choose Create.

Figure 11.123 TX GLO/TAMU Statute of Limitation Exception - Create Record

4. Specify the Report ID for which you want to maintain it.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 510
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.124 TX GLO/TAMU Statute of Limitation Exception - Create Record

5. Choose Save.

11.5.11.10 Maintain Production Disposition Xref

11.5.11.10.1 Use

Use this activity to create the association between the PRA Volume Types and the Disposition Codes used on the
GLO1 (oil) and GLO2 (gas) reports to define in which column the Production Volumes belong. This is done for both
report IDs and is used to map to the reports. This master is critical for correct reporting. It is used to identify formation
Production and non-formation Production Volumes.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 511
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.10.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain Production Disposition XRef. The Texas GLO/TAMU Prod Disp XRef - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.125 Texas GLO/TAMU Prod Disp XRef - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new Report Control, choose Create.

4. Specify Report, Well, Well Completion, Transport Method to be used, Volume type Code and Material to be
maintained.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 512
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.126 Texas GLO/TAMU Prod Disp XRef - Record Creation

5. Specify the Gas Disposition code and the Gas Production Code.

Figure 11.127 Texas GLO/TAMU Prod Disp XRef - Create Record

6. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 513
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.11 Maintain Royalty Disposition Xref

11.5.11.11.1 Use

Use this activity to create the association between the PRA volume types used for GLO and the Royalty Disposition
codes used on GLO2 ONLY in the Valuation section of the reports. This tells the Royalty report which column to put
the values.

11.5.11.11.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain Royalty Disposition XRef. The Texas GLO/TAMU Roy Disp XRef - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.128 Texas GLO/TAMU Roy Disp XRef - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new Roy Disp Xref, choose Create.

4. Enter Well, Well Completion, Product and Volume type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 514
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.129 Texas GLO/TAMU Roy Disp XRef - Record Creation

5. Enter the Gas Disposition Code and choose Save.

Figure 11.130 Texas GLO/TAMU Roy Disp XRef - Display Record

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 515
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.12 Maintain Business Associate Tax IDs

11.5.11.12.1 Use

Use this activity to create master, which allows you to tie purchaser to their taxpayer IDs.

11.5.11.12.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain Business Associate Tax IDs. The Texas Other Party Tax ID - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.131 Texas Other Party Tax ID - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new record for BA Tax ID, choose Create.

4. Enter Customer/Vendor Number and effective date.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 516
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.132 Texas Other Party Tax ID - Record Creation

5. Enter taxpayer ID.

Figure 11.133 Texas Other Party Tax ID - Display Record

6. Choose Save.

11.5.11.13 Maintain TX GLO/TAMU Own Level Report

Override

11.5.11.13.1 Use

Use this activity to override the state of Texas owner to either pay but do not report or to not pay but report on the
GLO1 (oil) and GLO2 (gas) reports. In addition, you can use this transaction to override a Lease number for a given
venture/DOI.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 517
Configuration Guide

11.5.11.13.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas Royalty →
Maintain TX GLO/TAMU Own Lvl Rpt Ovr. The TX GLO/TAMU Owner Lvl Report Override- Initial Screen
appears.

Figure 11.134 TX GLO/TAMU Owner Lvl Report Override - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new Owner Level Report Override, choose Create.

4. Enter required details.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 518
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.135 TX GLO/TAMU Owner Lvl Report Override - Record Creation

5. Choose Save.

11.5.12 Wyoming Royalty

11.5.12.1 Maintain Wyoming Lease Master

11.5.12.1.1 Use

Use this activity to Maintain Lease Details for different states.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 519
Configuration Guide

11.5.12.1.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain Lease Master. The Wyoming Lease Master - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.136 Wyoming Lease Master Data - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new Lease Master, choose Create.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 520
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.137 Wyoming Lease Master Data - Record Creation

4. Specify State Lease Number and its corresponding attributes.

5. Choose Save.

Figure 11.138 Wyoming Lease Master Data - Display Record

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 521
Configuration Guide

11.5.12.2 Maintain Wyoming Master Data

11.5.12.2.1 Use

Use this Activity to Link Lease and other attributes to Well/Well Completion or Venture/DOI or Measuring Point Level.

11.5.12.2.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain Master Data. The Wyoming Master Data - Initial Screen appears.

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

Figure 11.139 Wyoming Master Data - Initial Screen

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 522
Configuration Guide

3. To create a new Master Data, choose Create.

Figure 11.140 Wyoming Master Data - Record Creation

4. Specify the Report ID and its corresponding linkage to well/well completion, MP’s or Venture/DOI.

5. You can select the appropriate value for Override Flag, whether it should be System Derived or overridden to
Operated or Non-Operated.

Figure 11.141 Wyoming Master Data - Display Record

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 523
Configuration Guide

6. Specify Other Attributes Like Lease Details, Allocation Rate, Royalty Rate, etc.

Figure 11.142 Wyoming Master Data - Display Record

7. Choose Save.

11.5.12.3 Maintain Wyoming Reporting Price

11.5.12.3.1 Use

Use this activity to maintain the reporting price at the State Lease Number/ PSA, Wyoming Product Code, Effective-
From and To-dates. This transaction allows you to value the transactional data for reporting to the state.

11.5.12.3.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Royalty →
Maintain Wyoming Reporting Price. The Wyoming Reporting Price - Initial Screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 524
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.143 Wyoming Report Price - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new record, choose Create.

4. Enter required details like state lease number or PSA, Wyoming Product Code, Effective-From and To-dates.

Figure 11.144 Wyoming Report Price - Record Creation

5. Enter the price and choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 525
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.145 Wyoming Report Price - Display Record

11.5.12.4 Maintain WY Coal Bed Methane Override

11.5.12.4.1 Use

Use this activity to define at PRA Entity Level the scenarios, in which Wet Gas should be reported to the State as
Coal Bed Methane.

11.5.12.4.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Royalty →
Maintain WY Coal Bed Methane Override. The Wyoming Coal Bed Methane Override - Initial Screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 526
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.146 Wyoming Coal Bed Methane Override - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new record, choose Create.

4. Check the relevant radio button, the level at which it should be maintained like Well/Well Completion, MP’s,
Venture/DOI and enter the corresponding details.

Figure 11.147 Wyoming Coal Bed Methane Override - Record Creation

5. Choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 527
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.148 Wyoming Coal Bed Methane Override - Display Record

11.5.12.5 Maintain Wyoming Auto Suspend Master

11.5.12.5.1 Use

Use this activity to maintain Auto Suspension criteria to suspend the Royalty Transactions when they are not needed
to be reported for a Business reason.

11.5.12.5.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain ASU Master Data. The Wyoming Auto Suspend Master Data - Initial
Screen appears.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 528
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.149 Wyoming Auto Suspend Master Data - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new ASU Master, choose Create

Figure 11.150 Wyoming Auto Suspend Master Data - Create Record

4. You can select the level at which you want to suspend the records, at High Level, PRA Level or State Level. For
High Level Suspension, you can select to suspend the records for all sales dates, all PPA sales dates or you can
specify a sales date range.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 529
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.151 Wyoming Auto Suspend Master Data - Create Record

5. You can also suspend the records on PRA Entity/State level. Specify the selection criteria and it will show the
records which will be suspended.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 530
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.152 Wyoming Auto Suspend Master Data - Create Record

6. Choose Save.

11.5.12.6 Maintain Wyoming Statute of Limits

11.5.12.6.1 Use

Use this activity to maintain the Statute of Limitation for the Reporting of the Royalty Transactions.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 531
Configuration Guide

11.5.12.6.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain SOL Master Data. The Wyoming Statute of Limitation Master Data - Initial
Screen appears.

Figure 11.153 Wyoming Statute of Limitation Master Data - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new SOL Master, choose Create.

Figure 11.154 Wyoming Statute of Limitation Master Data - Create Record

4. You can create Statute of Limitations criteria by:

• Sales date if you want to indicate that all reporting activities prior to a specific sales date is out of statute and is
not to be reported.
• Filing period if you want to indicate that all reporting activities for specific number of months before the current
month is out of statute and is not to be reported.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 532
Configuration Guide

• Transactions that meet the specified criteria are not reported to the state, but the financial impacts of these
adjustments are journalized. After you have run a report, you can view out-of-statute transactions and write
them off in the out-of-statute write-off maintenance report.

5. Choose Save.

11.5.12.7 Maintain Wyoming SOL Exceptions

11.5.12.7.1 Use

Use this Activity to specify Exceptions to the above-mentioned Statute of Limitations criteria at Lease level for a
specific Sales Date or range of Sales Dates.
This allows you to specify the State Lease and Sales Dates, for which the Statute of Limitations criteria should be
overridden. All Royalty data that meets these criteria is reported based on the appropriate report.

11.5.12.7.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Texas
Royalty/Wyoming Royalty → Maintain SOL Exception Data. The Wyoming Statute of Limitation Exception - Initial
Screen appears.

Figure 11.155 Wyoming Statute of Limitation Exception - Initial Screen

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 533
Configuration Guide

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new SOL Exception, choose Create.

Figure 11.156 Wyoming Statute of Limitation Exception - Create Record

4. Specify the Report ID for which you want to maintain.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 534
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.157 Wyoming Statute of Limitation - Create Record

5. Choose Save.

11.5.12.8 Maintain Zero Volume Master

11.5.12.8.1 Use

Use this activity to report those Wells to the State which are not producing/sales for particular month but is still an
active property.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 535
Configuration Guide

You would report a group for the first time based upon the Well registration information that is provided to Wyoming. If
a Well becomes active in a certain month, but has no sales/production, Wyoming would have the Well as active for
that month and would issue the unreported letter if no return was filed with that group.

Note:
Do not report zero’s for shut in/plugged wells.

11.5.12.8.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Royalty →
Maintain Zero Volume Master. The Wyoming Zero Vol - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.158 Wyoming Zero Vol - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new record, choose Create.

4. Enter report ID, Reporting Company, Payer Code, State Lease Number, PSA, and Wyoming Product Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 536
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.159 Wyoming Zero Vol - Record Creation

5. Specify the Allocation Rate and Royalty Rate and choose Save.

Figure 11.160 Wyoming Zero Vol - Display Record

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 537
Configuration Guide

11.5.12.9 Maintain Wyoming CA Percent Override

11.5.12.9.1 Use

There are scenarios where Wells in units overlap the communization agreement. When the communication
agreement overlaps into the unit, the production for that portion of the communication agreement is included in the
gross production of the unit. The only part that is reported and paid on is the part of the communication agreement in
the unit.

Use this activity to add the percentage that should be applied to the unit.

11.5.12.9.2 Procedure

1. At the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax
and Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting → Royalty Reporting Portal → Master Data → Wyoming Royalty →
Maintain Wyoming CA Percent Override. The Wyoming CA Percent Override - Initial Screen appears.

Figure 11.161 Wyoming CA Percent Override - Initial Screen

2. To review or retrieve data, enter selection criteria and choose Execute.

3. To create a new record, choose Create.

4. Enter the Well and Well Completion.

5. Enter %Override and choose Save.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 538
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.162 Wyoming CA Percent Override - Record Creation

Figure 11.163 Wyoming CA Percent Override - Display Record

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 539
Configuration Guide

11.6 ONRR-2014 Configuration

11.6.1 Maintain Migration Configuration

11.6.1.1 Use

In this Customizing activity, you specify the first Sales Date (Date of Production) to be migrated to the new ONRR-
2014 report history. Only Sales Dates from this period forward may be amended through the ONRR-2014 reporting
process.

11.6.1.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Migration Configuration

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter the date which will act as first Sales date from which migration is to be done into new ONRR-2014 and
save.

Figure 11.164 ONRR-2014 Migration Configuration

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 540
Configuration Guide

11.6.2 Enable Process

11.6.2.1 Use

You can use this Customizing activity to enable the ONRR process.

11.6.2.2 Activities

Select ONRR_2014 in the ‘Process ID’ and the ‘Enabled’ checkbox.

11.6.2.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Enable Process

2. Mark the checkbox under Enabled column against the Process ID ‘ONRR_2014’ and save.

Figure 11.165 ONRR-2014 Process Enable Config Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 541
Configuration Guide

11.6.3 Maintain Process Groups

11.6.3.1 Use

You can use this customizing activity to assign the parallel processing configuration.

11.6.3.2 Activities

Do the following:
• Maintain Process ID
• Establish Process Group with Description

11.6.3.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Process Groups

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter Process ID as ‘ONRR_2014’.

4. In the same row, enter relevant Process Group along with Description and save the entry.

Figure 11.166 ONRR-2014 Process Group Config Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 542
Configuration Guide

11.6.4 Maintain ONRR-2014 Number Ranges

11.6.4.1 Use

You can use this Customizing activity to configure the Number Range setting for the ONRR Statute of Limitations.

11.6.4.2 Activities

Do the following:
• Select Maintain Number Range Intervals and create sequence 01 with number range from with 0000000001 and
number range to 9999999999.
• Select Maintain Configuration and associate the number range 01 to the transaction.

11.6.4.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain ONRR-2014 Number Ranges

2. To maintain number range for a particular option, click Maintain Number Range Interval button:

3. On the subsequent screen, click Insert Interval button:

4. In the pop-up box generated, enter the Interval Number, From Number and To Number. Press Enter.

Note
If From Number and To Number are suggested then suggested Rumber Range can be used.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 543
Configuration Guide

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 544
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.167 ONRR-2014 Maintaining Number Ranges

5. If multiple intervals are to be used (as per requirement), repeat the steps from 3 to 4.

6. In case of multiple intervals, additional configuration is required. Click Maintain Configuration:

7. On the subsequent screen where there will be a single row editable, press F4 in Number Range Number column
and select the Number Range Interval that is required at present.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 545
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.168 Number Range Interval Assignments to PRA Table

8. Repeat these steps for all the rows i.e. Number Range entries.

11.6.5 Maintain ONRR-2014 Company Configuration

11.6.5.1 Use

You use this Customizing activity to setup the configuration for journalization accounts used for each company.

Note
The account that you maintain in this configuration will be used while performing journalization.

11.6.5.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain ONRR-2014 Company Configuration

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain Company Code for which ONRR is configured.

4. For this same Company Code, maintain default G/L accounts for various JE entries created during ONRR
processing. For example Federal and Indian Royalty Summary clearing accounts, Recoupment accounts, Write-
off accounts, etc.

5. Finally, save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 546
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.169 ONRR-2014 Company Config Overview

Note
Maintenance of Section 6 Additional Royalty Account is applicable from Roadmap Year 2 (IS-PRA-XT 200)
onwards

11.6.6 Maintain Payors

11.6.6.1 Use

You can use this Customizing activity to define the configuration used for the Payor Code assigned by the ONRR and
Payor Name.

11.6.6.2 Activities

Enter the Payor Code, Payor Name and Description.

11.6.6.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Payors

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a unique Payor Code with corresponding Payor Name.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 547
Configuration Guide

4. For this Payor, maintain ‘Authorized name’ who is a person responsible for submitting ONRR-2014 report. You
can also maintain an overriding Payor code for this Payor. Finally, save the entry.

Figure 11.170 ONRR-2014 Payors Overview

11.6.7 Maintain ONRR Product Code Oil/Gas Indicator

XRef

11.6.7.1 Use

You use this Customizing activity to define the configuration used for determining Office of Natural Resources
Revenue (ONRR) indicators for Oil and Gas for Sliding Scale calculations. This affects the Royalty Rate that is used
to divide by, to come up with the inflated sales value.

11.6.7.2 Activities

Create the ONRR Product Codes X-Ref and select either Oil or Gas respectively.

11.6.7.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain ONRR Product Code Oil/Gas Indicator XRef

2. Click New Entries.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 548
Configuration Guide

3. Maintain entries as following. Select ONRR Product code and corresponding Product Indicator from the drop-
down list. Maintain corresponding/applicable ONRR Volume and Energy unit of Measurement. Save the entry.

Figure 11.171 ONRR-2014 Product Code Oil/Gas Indicator

11.6.8 Maintain Product Code / ONRR Product Code XRef

11.6.8.1 Use

You use this Customizing activity to define the configuration used for Full Product Code, Volume Type to the Office of
Natural Resources Revenue (ONRR) Product Code X-Ref.

11.6.8.2 Activities

Enter the Full Product and ONRR Product Code to create the PRA Product codes X-Ref and establish a relationship
between the PRA Product Code and ONRR Product Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 549
Configuration Guide

11.6.8.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Product Code / ONRR Product Code XRef

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain entries as following. Select Full Product code, Volume Type and corresponding ONRR Product Code
from the drop-down list. For this entry, if required, maintain overriding reporting Unit of Measurement. Save the
entry.

Figure 11.172 ONRR 2014 - Product Code/ONRR Product Code XRef

11.6.9 Maintain Marketing Type XRef

11.6.9.1 Use

You use this Customizing activity to define the configuration used to map the marketing costs to the Office of Natural
Resources Revenue (ONRR) allowance type.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 550
Configuration Guide

11.6.9.2 Activities

Create the Product Code and associate it to an Internal or External Type and to the Allowance Type recognized by
the ONRR.

11.6.9.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Marketing Type XRef

2. Click New Entries.

3. Maintain combination of Marketing type, Product code, Internal or External Indicator and then enter the
corresponding Allowance Type for this combination. Use drop-down list and F4 help for values. Save the entry.

Figure 11.173 ONRR - 2014 Marketing Type XRef Overview

11.6.10 Maintain Tribal Lockbox Payments

11.6.10.1 Use

You can use this Customizing activity to map the Tribal Codes for the Lockbox payments.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 551
Configuration Guide

11.6.10.2 Activities

Add a sequential numbering (Freeform) and Freeform Tribal Code/Allottee Code used for owner maintenance. This
will establish lockbox payments if the owner is a Tribal or Allottee Indian type.

11.6.10.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Tribal Lockbox Payments

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter unique tribe number and a description. Save the entry.

Figure 11.174 ONRR-2014 Tribal Lockbox Payments Overview

11.6.11 Cross-Client Maintenance of File Names and

Paths

11.6.11.1 Use

This activity (transaction FILE) is for cross-client maintenance of logical filenames and file paths and includes the
following:
• Logical file path definition
• Assignment of physical paths to logical path
• Logical file name definition, cross-client
• Definition of variables

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 552
Configuration Guide

• Syntax group definition

• Assignment of operating system to syntax group

Choose one of these in the navigation area of the screen to see the corresponding view of the values to be
maintained. You can examine existing entries and enter new values. Depending on the data you need to maintain,
you can either work in the overview or you may need to go to the details view by pressing F2 or the "Details"
pushbutton in the application toolbar.

Note
Release 3.0C introduces cross-client logical filename maintenance. In addition to cross-client maintenance
you can still choose to maintain filenames for a specific client. You must maintain a logical filename across
clients before you can maintain it for one client. Then you can maintain it for particular clients as required.

Use program RSFILE01 to transfer filenames from the client-specific maintenance (available before Release 3.0C) to
cross-client maintenance. Client-specific data is not affected.

11.6.11.2 Activities

• Verify that existing definitions meet your needs.

• Change the definitions (and, if necessary, the structure of your file system).
• If necessary, define additional filenames and paths.

11.6.11.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Cross-Client Maintenance of File Names and Paths

2. Select Logical File path Definition node and click New Entries.

3. Enter Logical file path and Name. Save the entry.

4. Select the just created entry. Expand the Logical File Path Definition node and double-click the Assignment of
Physical Paths to Logical Path child node.

5. Click New Entries. For the logical path created, enter the Syntax Group and the Physical Path. Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 553
Configuration Guide

Figure 11.175 Logical File Path Definition Overview

Figure 11.176 Assignment of Physical Paths to Logical Path

11.6.12 Maintain Default Reporting Units of Measure

11.6.12.1 Use

In this Customizing activity you specify the default SAP unit of measure for reporting the quantities to the ONRR
agency. This is used for non-system generated entries from transactions like Load History Compare or Manual 2014
Workplace. These Customizing entries have to be maintained if you are not using standard units of measure for
major product codes. The standard units of measure for some of the major product codes are as follows:
• Oil
o Volume = BB6
• Gas
o Energy = MBD
o Volume = MC2
o Heating Value = BC2

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 554
Configuration Guide

• Plant NGLs
o Volume = UG6
• Sulfur
o Volume = LTO

For gas-related products, you have to define the reporting units of measure for volume, heat value, and energy.

11.6.12.2 Activities

Add the unit of measure for dimensions of major product code.

11.6.12.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Default Reporting Units of Measure

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a Dimension Key and Product code combination. For the combination, enter the default reporting UOM.

4. Save the entry.

Figure 11.177 ONRR-2014 Default Reporting Units of Measure

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 555
Configuration Guide

11.6.13 Maintain ONRR-2014 Interest Configuration

11.6.13.1 Use

In this Customizing activity, you set up the configuration for Interest calculation. The following execution options are
available:
• Integrated calculations, report lines, and journal entries
• Integrated calculation only
• Independent calculation only
• No interest processing

When integrated, listed functions are performed as part of report processing. When independent, listed functions can
be executed separately from report processing with the transaction /PRA/FP_DISP_INT_CAL.

11.6.13.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain ONRR-2014 Interest Configuration

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter the desired configuration from the given options.

4. Save the entry.

11.6.14 Maintain Section 6 Default Rates

11.6.14.1 Use

In this Customizing activity, you can set up Section 6 override values by Company Code.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 556
Configuration Guide

11.6.14.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Maintain Section 6 Default Rates

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter the override rate for a combination of Company Code, ONRR Product Code and the Sales Month.

4. Save the entry.

Figure 11.178 ONRR-2014 Section 6 Default Reviews Overview

11.6.15 Maintain Sales Type Descriptions

11.6.15.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you can define sales codes to be used in MMS reporting, for your company.

The MMS (Minerals Management Service) has its own codes that are used to describe various reporting situations
(such as: Royalty-in-Kind, Arm's Length, etc.). Here, you can define your own codes to represent those sales
situations (where sales codes represent sales situations) that your company uses. Some of the codes are MMS-
Payor specific.

Note that all of the sales codes that are Payor-specific begin with AG*. For example, AG01 could represent an
"offshore agreement" in your system.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 557
Configuration Guide

11.6.15.2 Activities

In this activity, on the Display View "MMS-2014: Sales Type Control Table": Overview screen, you can view the list of
Sales Codes, cross-referenced with their descriptions, which are already maintained. To add your own Sales Codes,
select Change/Display, and then New Entries.

Note
When you select New Entries, the entries will appear in white, indicating that you can maintain them.
However, you can only maintain the entries that begin with AG* (the entries for MMS-payor).
Make your entries and then select Save.

11.6.15.3 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Enhancements → Maintain Sales Type Descriptions

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a unique Sales Type and Description.

4. Save the entry.

Figure 11.179 MMS-2014 Sales Type Control Table Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 558
Configuration Guide

11.6.16 Maintain Distributee Codes

11.6.16.1 Use

You can use this Customizing activity to configure the Distributee Codes.

Distributee Code is used for cases where the Indian payment is done to the Mineral Management System (MMS)
through wire transfer (PM3).

11.6.16.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Enhancements → Maintain Distributee Codes

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a unique Distributee Code and Description. Enter classification for the Distributee code as Tribal or Both or
Allottee.

4. Save the entry.

Figure 11.180 ONRR-2014 Distributee Code Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 559
Configuration Guide

11.6.17 Maintain Custom Validation Error Codes

11.6.17.1 Use

You can use this Customizing activity to define the configuration for determining warnings or errors.

11.6.17.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Enhancements → Maintain Custom Validation Error
Codes

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a unique Error Code. For the Error Code, maintain ‘Error Severity’. Enable the Error Code by checking the
checkbox under column ‘Enabled’.

4. Save the entry.

Figure 11.181 ONRR-2014 Error Codes Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 560
Configuration Guide

11.6.18 Maintain Custom 2014 Edits

11.6.18.1 Use

You can use this Customizing activity to define the configuration for Custom 2014 Edits.

11.6.18.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Enhancements → Maintain Custom 2014 Edits

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a unique Edit Code. For the Edit Code, maintain ‘Edit Severity’ from the drop-down list available. Enable
the Edit Code by checking the checkbox under column ‘Enabled’.

4. Save the entry.

Figure 11.182 ONRR-2014 Edit Codes Overview

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 561
Configuration Guide

11.6.19 Maintain Valid Edit Codes Per Transaction

Codes

11.6.19.1 Use

In this Customizing activity, the user defines the valid ONRR edits (by ONRR edit number) to the appropriate
assigned ONRR Transaction Codes.

11.6.19.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Enhancements → Maintain Valid Edit Codes Per
Transaction Codes

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a valid Transaction Code from the F4 help available. For the Transaction Code, maintain an ‘Edit Code’
from the F4 help available.

4. Save the entry.

Figure 11.183 ONRR-2014 Valid Edit Based on Transaction Code

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 562
Configuration Guide

11.6.20 Maintain Additional Dispositions Contract

Types

11.6.20.1 Use

In this Customizing activity, you can maintain Contract Types that will be used to override the Product Code 15 in
ONRR 2014 processing.

11.6.20.2 Procedure

1. Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Workplace Processing→ Process Specific
Configuration → ONRR-2014 → Enhancements → Maintain Additional Dispositions
Contract Types

2. Click New Entries.

3. Enter a valid Contract Type from the F4 help available and save.

11.6.21 ONRR-2014 Master Data

In addition to the above configuration steps, there are minimum Master Data maintenance steps that need to be
performed

11.6.21.1 Maintain Owner Group

11.6.21.1.1 Use

You can choose to Group Owners to form an Owner Group which can be processed as whole in a single ONRR run.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 563
Configuration Guide

11.6.21.1.2 Procedure

Transaction Code /PRA/FP_OWN_GRP

1. Access the activity using the following navigation option:

2. Create new record by pressing ‘F5’ or .

3. Provide an Owner Group name and press Enter.

4. Provide a description to the Owner Group in Description field.

5. Enter the Owners that are to be processed as a Group in the table provided in the lower half of the screen.

6. Save the entry.

11.6.21.2 Maintain Lease

11.6.21.2.1 Use

Lease is an integral part and the first step towards master data step for ONRR reporting.

A Lease specifies the number of any contract, profit-sharing agreement, joint venture, or agreement issued or
approved by the United States under a Mineral Leasing Law that authorizes exploration for, extraction of, or removal
of Oil or Gas.

11.6.21.2.2 Procedure

Transaction Code /PRA/FP_LEASE

1. Access the activity using the following navigation option:

2. Create new record by pressing ‘F5’ or .

3. In following steps, Lease attributes need to be provided.

• Provide ‘Lease number’ and ‘Effective from Month’ and press ‘Enter’.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 564
Configuration Guide

• Provide ‘Lease Name’, ‘Effective To Month’, ‘Lessor Code’.

• Provide the mandatory data based upon lessor code, On-shore/Off-shore indicator
• Supply the ‘Lease Royalty Rate’ which is a mandatory information.

4. For Roadmap year 2 component, Section 6 details can also be maintained.

5. Save the entry.

11.6.21.3 Maintain Agreement

11.6.21.3.1 Use

Agreement specifies an ONRR assigned number for those leases that have royalty-bearing production allocated from
an agreement. A ten-digit number that consists of a 3-character prefix, 6-character body, and 1-character suffix. The
agreement number field in the ONRR-2014 report can accommodate an eleven digit number (2-digit suffix) for
potential future use.

With respect to the Agreement, Lease(s) along with their Participation Factor(s) can be maintained.

11.6.21.3.2 Procedure

Transaction Code /PRA/FP_AGREE

1. Access the activity using the following navigation option:

2. Create new record by pressing ‘F5’ or .

3. Provide the Prefix, Serial Number, Suffix and the Effective From Month and press Enter.

4. In the table Control, maintain the Leases along with their participation factor in the Agreement. The sum of
participation factors should not be greater than ‘1’.

5. Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 565
Configuration Guide

11.6.21.4 Maintain Master

11.6.21.4.1 Use

For ONRR reporting to start functioning, one of the major steps in Master Data setup is ‘Maintain Master’. Leases
created in the previous steps need to be tied to either Venture/DOI or Well/Well Completion. User is given an option
to maintain Master Data tied to either of the 2 options.

11.6.21.4.2 Procedure

Transaction Code /PRA/FP_MASTER

1. Access the activity using the following navigation option:

2. Create new record by pressing ‘F5’ or .

3. On the subsequent pop-up if Venture/DOI is chosen, enter the Company Code, Joint Venture, DOI, Effective
From Month and Owner number(optional) OR if Well/Well Completion is chosen then provide Well, Well
Completion, Effective From Month and Owner(again optional). Press Enter.

4. On the ‘Master - Create Record’ screen, enter the Effective To Month and the Payor Code which are mandatory
requirements.

5. On the tab ‘Lease Details’, maintain Lease Numbers, Agreement (if available) and their allocation percentage.
Allocation percent is the percentage of a PRA detail transaction that is allocated to a given lease or lease/agreement
combination when reported to the ONRR. Sum of allocation factors for all the leases should not be greater than 1.

6. On the same tab, an option to provide ‘Override Royalty Rate’ against a Lease is also available. It specifies the
Override Rate used to calculate the royalty due on Federal or Indian production.

7. Common steps as below are to be followed there on.

• In the tab Product code overrides, an option to override the ONRR product Code for a given combination of
Company Code/Venture/DOI/Contract/Full Product Code/Volume Type.
• Similarly, Sales type overrides can be maintained in the ‘Sales Type Overrides’ tab.
• To override transaction codes, check-boxes for Compensatory Royalty, Section 6 Lease, Royalty relief Shallow
and Royalty Relief Deep can be checked as per the subject Leases on Master data level.
• Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 566
Configuration Guide

11.6.21.5 Maintain Contract/Sales Type Xref

11.6.21.5.1 Use

The ONRR/MMS requires separate lines of Royalty detail based on the nature of the sale. Payors report the
disposition of their production, including the distinction between 'Arms-Length' and 'Non-Arms Length' contracts, as
well as contract type. A 'pooled' sales type code allows reporting of all pooled sales under a separate sales type
code. It is hence, required to have a cross-reference between Sales Contract and the Sales Type for ONRR
reporting.

11.6.21.5.2 Procedure

Transaction Code /PRA/FP_CTXRF

1. Access the activity using the following navigation option:

2. Create new record by pressing ‘F5’ or .

3. Provide the Contract Number and press Enter.

4. On the subsequent screen, maintain the appropriate Sales Type Code.

5. Save the entry.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 567
Configuration Guide

12 Regulatory Reporting

12.1 Purpose

This configuration guide provides the information you need to set up the configuration of this building block manually.

If you do not want to configure manually and prefer an automated installation process using eCATTs and BC Sets,
use the SAP Best Practices Installation Assistant.

12.2 Preparation

12.2.1 Prerequisites

The following building blocks form the basis of all SAP Best Practices for Mining scenarios in the supplier system.
You only have to install these building blocks once.

Building Blocks Comment

Baseline Building Blocks (Layer 0)

B32 – Best Practices Installation

J02 – Organization Structure

N69 – FI Basics

N70 – FI Local

N71 – CCA

J05 – Materials Management

J04 – Sales and Distribution

Baseline Building Blocks (Layer 1)

J06 – Production Planning and Control

J18 – Product Cost Planning

J19 – Batch Management

J07 – Quality Management

Quick Guide

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 568
Configuration Guide

Industry-Generic Building Blocks

X02 - Generic ORG Structure

X10 - FI CO DELTA

X11 - MM DELTA

X03 - Generic Master Data

X15 - PM

12.3 Configuration

12.3.1 Regulatory Reporting Master Data Setup

12.3.1.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you carry out the customizing that will determine exactly how the Report Master Data Set-Up
screen will look in terms of the fields available, and the drop-down list values available for those fields. You can
specify the master data set-up for states and for federal regulatory reports (MMS; for a detailed description of state
and MMS steps for specific reports, please scroll down in this document).

Please note that the menu structure in this activity (on the left) operates in a drill-down manner: each node is
processed before the node under it. Thus, when you select, select from the top down. You make your selections by
double-clicking the menus in descending order at left, and each time that you make a selection at left, the screen
frame at right is filled with options for that choice.

In this IMG activity, you set up the possible attributes for specific fields used on reports. The fields appear on the
Report Master Data Set-Up screen as master data fields.

Kindly refer the F1 help for the customizing node before you proceed. This will provide additional information to
maintain the necessary entries.

12.3.1.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 569
Configuration Guide

Regulatory/Production Reporting→ Regulatory Reporting Master Data Setup

The following screen shows some sample reports and how the values should be maintained.

Figure 12.1 Reporting Agencies Overview

Select the reporting agency and double-click reports to view the reporting options for the agency. For example,
reports for TXR.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 570
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.2 Reports Overview

Similarly the report can be selected to maintain and review further structures assigned structures and other values.
For example, Tx H10.

Figure 12.3 Assigned Structures Overview

12.3.2 Regulatory Reporting Customizing

12.3.2.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you make your customizing settings per report.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 571
Configuration Guide

You only have to make these settings once. Here, you define how the report is to be run (this activity - Regulatory
Reporting Customizing - defines how the report is to be set up, whereas the Regulatory Reporting Master Data Setup
defines how the O3UREP_MASTER screen will be set up).

Note:
The IMG menu functions in this activity function in a 'drill-down' manner. Each entry in the menu is
dependent on the entry above it. For example, you first choose Reporting Agencies, and then in the frame at
right, choose an agency. Then, you double-click Reports in the frame at the left, and from the reports that are
defaulted at right, choose one or more reports from the frame at the right, and proceed in that manner down
the menu until you have made all your selections.

Please use the F1 help for the node to get the additional details.

12.3.2.2 Procedure

Access the activity using one of the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →
Regulatory/Production Reporting→ Regulatory Reporting Customizing

On Reporting Agencies table screen, make the following entries:

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 572
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.4 Reporting Agencies Overview

Select the reporting agency and maintain the values using the F1 help for the fields. The screenshot is only for
reference purposes.

Figure 12.5 Maintainable Fields Overview

Maintain the required values for the other nodes as required.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 573
Configuration Guide

12.3.3 Report Submission Setup

12.3.3.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure PRA report submission parameters.

12.3.3.2 Procedure

Access the activity using one of the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →
Regulatory/Production Reporting→ Report Submission Setup

On Define Submission Group screen, make the following entries:

Figure 12.6 Define Submission Groups Overview

Under the node Group Report Submissions, maintain required entries. The screenshot can be used as reference.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 574
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.7 Group Report Submissions Overview

Maintain the entries for Reporting Levels. The screenshot can be used as reference.

Figure 12.8 Reporting Levels Overview

12.3.4 PRA to Agency Xref Customizing

12.3.4.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you configure PRA report submission parameters.

12.3.4.2 Procedure

In this IMG activity, you map SAP values for specific fields to state agency values for the same fields. For example,
for well status, the state agency will likely have one value for a specific well status, which is different than the value
for the well status in SAP. Here, you can create records that link the SAP value to the agency value for a specific
field.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 575
Configuration Guide

Activities
When you access this IMG activity, you select a Rep.Agency, which corresponds to a U.S. state. Then, in the
RegReport field, choose a regulatory report.
• If there are already values maintained for that report, the Field Name field will appear, directly under the
RegReport field. The field name is the field that you are mapping SAP values to state agency values for.
• If the Field Name field does not appear, it means that there is nothing to maintain.

If the Field Name field appears, there will be a list of entries in the ALV list. You can then select an item from the list
of records, and select Change/Display to set up the SAP value <-> Agency value cross-reference for that field.

The values that you will see in the list on the screen are from SAP, and are delivered as system table entries. SAP
ships templates of entries for those fields, where there is something to maintain.

12.3.4.3 Procedure

Access the activity using one of the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →
Regulatory/Production Reporting→ PRA to Agency Xref Customizing

On the table maintain the required entries for the Reporting Agency, Reg Report and Field Name combinations. The
entries are dependent on the selections made above.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 576
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.9 Report Value Xref

12.3.5 Regulatory Reporting Major Pd Code / Volume

Type Mapping

12.3.5.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define which data entities will be relevant for the specific report. Specifically, you map major
product code (Pd) to volume type code (VTC). This also tells the system which volumes from the SAP system go into
which columns on the report itself (the report that you submit to the agency).

Major product code can be, for example: oil, gas, condensate, water, sulfur, or injectants.

Volume type code is a two-character code that identifies the volume types: fuel system, purchased fuel, plant fuel,
produced water, injected water, lease fuel, etc.

Example
The following example applies to the Texas H-10 Report, but the other reports are similar:

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 577
Configuration Guide

For a single well, you could have produced oil, gas, as well as some injectant (for example, 500 barrels of oil, 100
barrels of gas, and 50 barrels of injectant). You want to map (link) those products to volume types, and link them to
specific columns on the actual report that you submit to the agency.

On the Change View Regulatory Reporting Generic Report Major Product Cd / VT Cross-r screen, in the Pd field, you
would enter each product that the well produced. In the VTC field for each product, you enter a volume type for that
product. In the Field Name field, you enter the technical field name.

That does two things:

• It maps product to volume type and field name.
• It defines that product/volume type for the report, and means that each product will correspond to one column in
the actual report.

12.3.5.2 Procedure

Access the activity using one the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →
Regulatory/Production Reporting→ Regulatory Reporting Major Pd Code / Volume
Type Mapping

The popup allows you to select the various reports for which the mapping can be maintained.

For the report you select you get the table with fields corresponding to that report.

The important things to maintain which might be common to all are as follows.

Figure 12.10 OGOR-A Volume-Type to Reporting-Column X-ref

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 578
Configuration Guide

12.3.6 MMS OGOR Additonal Settings

12.3.6.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you define customizing settings specific to MMS Reporting.

In addition to maintaining the well status/reason code relationship in the Common Table, valid well status / reason
code, and reason code / action code combinations can be maintained (action codes are codes that represent what
action is to be taken to get a well completion 'up' - productive again, after it was 'down').

When you select the IMG activity, a dialog box is displayed, with the following options:
• Define Allowed Well Status - Reason Code Combinations - This defines which combinations of well status
(code) and reason code are acceptable, and which are not acceptable. (The combinations themselves come
from the MMS). To define allowed well status - reason code combinations, select well status / reason code
combination, then, for each record, indicate whether it is 'acceptable' or 'unacceptable'. The MMS has specific
rules - for instance - on which reason code and action code is valid for specific statuses. For example, for an oil
well, you can have a reason code defining why it is 'down' or 'abandoned'.
• Define Allowed Reason Code - Action Code Combinations - Similar to the above, you define which
combinations of reason code and action code are acceptable, and which are unacceptable. An action code is a
one-digit code - out of five possibilities, of what is to happen to a well that is down (what action is required to get
the well productive again). A 'reason code' is a code that defines the reason why a well is down. For each entry
in the table, indicate whether it is 'acceptable' or 'unacceptable'.
• Cross Referencing MjPdCd, VT to MMS Codes (OGOR A) - Here, and in the two options below (OGOR B,
OGOR C), you map (link) volume types to MMS codes. You customize volume-type data here, to reflect how
your company does business. You also define where the volume types should print in the report columns.
• Cross Referencing MajPdCd, VT to MMS Codes (OGOR B) -
• Cross Referencing MajPdCd, VT to MMS Codes (OGOR C) -

12.3.6.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →
Regulatory/Production Reporting→ MMS OGOR Additonal Settings

The popup allows you to select the Define allowed Well Status - Reason Code combinations or Define allowed
Reason Code- Action Code combinations.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 579
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.11 MMS Well Status / Reason Code Combinations

Action Codes table

Figure 12.12 Action Codes Table

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 580
Configuration Guide

12.3.7 Louisiana (old reporting version)

12.3.7.1 Use

In this IMG activity, you carry out the customizing settings that are relevant for Louisiana reporting:
• - Definition of the relevant conservation districts to be used
• - Definition of the parish / counties to be used
• - Definition of the commingling facilities to be used
• - Relevant companies
• - Relevant fields
• - Relevant leases / units / wells
• - Field plant codes
• - Groups codes / volume type cross references

12.3.7.2 Procedure

Access the activity using the following navigation path:

Transaction Code SPRO

IMG Menu Industry Solution Oil & Gas (PRA) → Production, Tax and Royalty Reporting →
Regulatory/Production Reporting→ Louisiana (old reporting version)

The popup allows you to select the Define allowed Well Status - Reason Code combinations or Define allowed
Reason Code- Action Code combinations.

Field name Description User action and values Note

Parish No

Parish name

County Code

Version

User

Timestamp

Result
The Louisiana (old reporting version) is maintained.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 581
Configuration Guide

12.3.8 BadI: Determine CO2 Percentage for MMS OGOR

12.3.8.1 Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the IS-PRA-XT component.

This BAdI enables you to plug-in external algorithm/logic for the calculation of CO2 percentage in Minerals
Management Service (MMS) Regulatory report.

Note:
If there is no active implementation, then the default implementation is executed.

Standard settings

In the standard system, the Business Add-In is activated.

The BAdI is designed for multiple use.

The BAdI is not filter-dependent.

Activities
After you call the IMG activity, the system displays a dialog box where you enter a name for the implementation.

If implementations of this Business Add-In have already been created, the system displays them in a dialog box. You
then choose one of them by choosing Create, and continue as follows:
1. In the dialog box, enter a name for the implementation of the Add-In and choose Create. The system displays
the initial screen for creating Business Add-In implementations.

2. On this screen, enter a short description for your implementation in the Implementation Short Text field.

3. If you choose the Interface tab, you will notice that the system has populated the Name of the Implementing
Class field automatically, by assigning a class name based on the name of your implementation.

4. Save your entries and assign the Add-In to a package.

5. To edit a method, double-click its name.

6. Enter your implementation code between the method <Interface Name>~<Name of Method>. and endmethod.
statements.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 582
Configuration Guide

7. Save and activate your code. Navigate back to the Change Implementation screen.

Note:
You can also create an implementation for an Add-In and not activate it until later. If you want to do this, do
not perform the following step:

8. Choose Activate. When the application program is executed, the code you created is run through.

12.4 Regulatory Reporting - Master Data Setup

12.4.1 Purpose

The Regulatory Reporting application area is used to produce volumetric reports based on production data. These
reports are used to meet the requirements of many state and federal agencies.

12.4.2 Master Setup and Report Submission

(O3UREP_MASTER)

12.4.3 Use

Use this to create the required master data for Production Regulatory Reporting.

The first step in generating the production regulatory reports is to create the relevant master data. Master data
creation is used to do two things:
• Set up the relevant Regulatory IDs for reporting
• Linking SAP Production entity IDs with state agency IDs

The reason that this is necessary is that the state agency will often have a different ID for production entities (well
completions and measurement points) than the ID used in your SAP system. You will thus need to create IDs that
you can then send to the state agency, and/or link SAP IDs with state agency IDs, so that the agency IDs can be
identified in the SAP system (cross-reference is made and saved in tables in SAP). This maps the SAP ID to the state
agency ID, for identification purposes.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 583
Configuration Guide

12.4.3.1 Procedure

From the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax and
Royalty Reporting → Production Regulatory Reporting → New Regulatory Reporting → Master Setup and Report
Submission.

Using this transaction you can maintain the master data as desired using the state agency reference ID based on the
report selected. For example, for the Well master data for MMS report.

Figure 12.13 Minerals Management

Use the Monthly Processing tab, to create, regenerate and finalize the reports. Reports once finalized cannot be
altered.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 584
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.14 Report Generation of Minerals Management

12.4.4 Adjust MMS Reports (O3UREP_MMS_EDIT)

12.4.4.1 Use

This node can be used to adjust the MMS reports.

12.4.4.2 Procedure

From the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax and
Royalty Reporting → Production Regulatory Reporting → New Regulatory Reporting →Adjust MMS Reports.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 585
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.15 Regulatory Reporting MMS Adjustment

12.4.5 Maintain Operator and Contact Information

(O3UREP_OPERATOR)

12.4.5.1 Use

Use this to create operator and contact master data, which is required for production regulatory reporting.

Before you can submit production regulatory reports to state agencies (or federal agencies), you will have to first
maintain the operator and contact information. This master record is set up per report, state, and reporting unit of
your company. You create one record per agency and report, and the record identifies the relevant operator of the
lease, and internal contact person in your company, who will serve as a contact with respect to the state agency.

12.4.5.2 Procedure

From the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax and
Royalty Reporting → Production Regulatory Reporting → New Regulatory Reporting → Maintain Operator and
Contact Information.

Here the operator can be linked to a customer for the required details.

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 586
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.16 Regulatory Reporting Operator and Contact Xref

12.4.6 Alternate Maintenace for Measurement

Point/State Assigned ID XRef
(O3UCM_TAB_MAINT_012)

12.4.6.1 Use

Use this to create MP to state assigned ID reference.

12.4.6.2 Procedure

From the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Logistics → Production and Revenue Accounting → Production, Tax and
Royalty Reporting → Production Regulatory Reporting → New Regulatory Reporting → Alternate maintenance for
Measurement Point/State Assigned ID XRef

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 587
Configuration Guide

Figure 12.17 Regulatory Reporting X-ref - MP to State Assigned ID

Configuration Guide – Version: 1.4 – Final © 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 588
www.sap.com/contactsap

© 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.